AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.
English
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 114
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 115
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
CONFIGURATIONS
89
Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Registering the remote control code for a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Registering the remote control codes for playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Programming from other remote controls (learning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Clearing functions learned from other remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Resetting remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Updating the unit’s firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(Sound Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
En
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
125
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Power and system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
En
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
Operating range of the remote control
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.
Remote control
Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
Within
6 m (20 ft)
30°
30°
Insert the batteries the right
way round.
AM antenna
FM antenna
*One of the above is supplied depending on the region *One of the above is supplied depending on the region
of purchase.
of purchase.
YPAO microphone
Power cable
• The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model, unless otherwise
specified.
*The supplied power cable varies depending on the region
of purchase.
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
CD-ROM
Easy Setup Guide
Safety Brochure
(Owner’s Manual)
• This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone”
and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
•
•
indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
Accessories
En
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
Wide variety of supported content
Supports 2- to 7-channel (plus front presence) speaker
system and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows
you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles.
• iPod/iPhone/iPad
• USB
. p.64
. p.68
. p.71
. p.74
. p.76
• Automatically optimizing the speaker
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
. p.40
• Media server (PC/NAS)
• Internet radio
• AirPlay
• Reproducing stereo or multichannel
sounds with the sound fields like
actual movie theaters and concert halls
(CINEMA DSP)
. p.52
• Enjoying compressed music with
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
. p.56
. p.19
• Bi-amp connections, channel
expansion (with external power-amp)
and multi-zone configurations to
enhance your system
Speakers
Audio
Audio
iPod/iPhone/iPad
HDMI Control
Audio
USB device
3D and 4K signals supported
HDMI Control
Video
Audio/Video
TV
BD/DVD player
AV receiver (the unit)
Operating external
devices with the supplied
remote control
Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
Change the input source and favorite
settings with one touch (SCENE)
The unit’s
remote control
. p.119
. p.137
. p.49
TV remote control
FEATURES
➤
What you can do with the unit
En
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Full of useful functions!
Useful tips
I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for
video and non-HDMI for audio...
❑ Connecting various devices (p.31)
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),
game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.
Connecting front presence speakers allows you to
create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own
speakers are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker
(VPS) function produces 3D surround sound.
Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the
type of an audio input jack to be used for the
corresponding input source (p.87).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.103).
BD/DVD
player
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the
output destination of signals input into the unit (p.106).
Your TV speakers may be selected as an output
destination.
CD player
Game
console
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a
language from English, Japanese, French, German,
Spanish, Russian and Chinese (p.39).
Camcorder
I want to update the firmware...
TV
Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu
to update the unit’s firmware (p.118). If the unit is
connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed
on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.124).
❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.57)
The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You
Turntable
Many other settings are available that let you to
customize the unit. For details, see the following
pages.
❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.25)
When using an ARC -compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio
input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control
signals.
❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.55)
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays
back the selected source with the least circuitry, which
lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
• Input settings (p.89)
• Scene settings (p.92)
• Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.95)
• Various function settings (p.98)
❑ Easy operation with a TV screen
You can navigate through different types of content
(such as iPod, USB, and network), view information, or
easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu.
• Information view (such as audio signal and video
signal) (p.114)
HDMI Control
TV audio
• System settings (p.116)
❑ Low power consumption
Video from
external device
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the
unit’s power consumption (p.113).
FEATURES
➤
What you can do with the unit
En
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part names and functions
Front panel
1
2
3
4
5
MAIN ZONE
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
INPUT
6
7
8
1 MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
7 Front panel door
For protecting controls and jacks (p.9)
Opening the front panel door
• To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently
press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed
when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)
2 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
8 VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.106)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.107)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.108)
• An iPod is being charged (p.64)
3 Front display
Displays information (p.10).
4 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).
5 PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.55).
6 INPUT knob
Selects an input source.
FEATURES
➤
Part names and functions
En
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Inside of the front panel door
9
0
A B C
D E
F
GH
I J
K
L
ON SCREEN
OPTION
TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT
SCENE
INFO
FM
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
1
2
3
4
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
ENTER
ZONE 2
ZONE CONTROL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PHONES
VIDEO AUX
YPAO MIC
USB
SILENT CINEMA
5V
2.1A
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
HDMI IN
M
N
O
P
9 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
G MULTI ZONE keys
P VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting devices, such as camcorders and game
consoles (p.34).
ZONE 2
Enables/disables the audio output to
Zone2 (p.81).
0 Menu operations keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ZONE CONTROL Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2)
that is controlled by the keys and knobs
on the front panel (p.81).
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.
H INFO key
A OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.84).
I MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.58).
B DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.83).
J FM and AM keys
Switch between FM and AM (p.57).
C TONE/BALANCE key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.85).
Adjusts the right/left channel volume balance for Zone2
(p.82).
K PRESET keys
L TUNING keys
D STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.54).
M USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.68) or an iPod
(p.64).
E PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.51).
N YPAO MIC jack
F SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.49).
O PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
FEATURES
➤
Part names and functions
En
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front display (indicators)
1
2
3 4
5
7
8
9
HD
STEREO TUNED
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PARTY
ZONE
2
IN OUT1 OUT2
PL
SL
L C R
SW
PR
SR
ENHANCER SLEEP
3
SBL SB SBR
0
A
B
B
C
1 HDMI
6 Information display
C Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
H Surround back speaker (L)
J Surround back speaker (R)
K Surround back speaker
Z Front presence speaker (L)
X Front presence speaker (R)
L Subwoofer
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.83).
IN
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.
7 MUTE
Blinks when audio is muted.
OUT1/OUT2
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI
signal.
8 Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
2 STEREO
9 ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.85) is working.
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
0 ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.56) is
working.
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.
HD
A CINEMA DSP
Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.52) is working. “CINEMA
DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.54) is activated.
(U.S.A. model only)
Lights up when the unit is receiving an HD Radio station
signal.
B Cursor indicators
3 ZONE2
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
Lights up when Zone2 is enabled (p.81).
4 SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
5 PARTY
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.82)
FEATURES
➤
Part names and functions
En 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear panel
1
2
3 4 5 6
7
8
9
0
A
B
C
D
(U.S.A. model)
HDMI
AV
DC OUT
NETWORK
RS-232C
(
3
)
HDMI OUT
NET
5V
0.5A
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
4
AV
5
AV
6
AV
7
1
2
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
TRIGGER
OUT
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
PB
Y
AV
3
4
PB
PR
C
AV
A
1
2
1
REMOTE
IN OUT
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
Y
PB
PR
AV
B
2
D
AV
12V
0.1A
AUDIO
(2 TV)
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
L
1
2
R
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE
2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK
AC IN
SURROUND
CENTER
FRONT
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
EXTRA SP
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
BI–AMP
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
RADIO)
AM
FM
75Ω
SINGLE
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to
prevent improper connections.
E F
G
H
I
J
K
1 PHONO jacks
For connecting to a turntable (p.33).
8 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–4) jacks
For connecting to video playback devices that support
component video and inputting video signals (p.31).
D VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.38).
2 DC OUT jack
For connecting to an optional accessory.
9 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.31).
E ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.34).
3 NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network (p.35).
0 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
(component video) jacks
outputting video signals (p.29) or for connecting to a Zone2
video monitor (p.79).
F AUDIO 1–4 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting
audio signals (p.33).
4 AV 1–4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.31).
G MULTI CH INPUT jacks
For connecting to a device that supports multi-channel
output and inputting audio signals (p.36).
5 AV OUT jacks
For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a
VCR) (p.36).
For connecting to a Yamaha product that supports SCENE
link playback (p.37) or for connecting to an infrared signal
receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other
devices from another room (p.80).
H ZONE OUT jacks
For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and
for outputting audio (p.79).
6 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
(composite video/S-video) jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports composite video or
S-video and outputting video signals (p.29) or for connecting
to a Zone2 video monitor (p.79).
I PRE OUT jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.17) or
to an external power amplifier (p.23).
B TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function
(p.37).
7 HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks
J SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.14).
C RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.
Consult your dealer for details.
For connecting to HDMI-compatible TVs and outputting
video/audio signals (p.25). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
K AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.38).
FEATURES
➤
Part names and functions
En 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter
A Radio keys
Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the
input source (p.57).
1
2
Transmits infrared signals.
2 SOURCE z key
Turns on/off an external device.
SOURCE key
Sets the remote control to operate external devices (p.120).
RECEIVER key
Sets the remote control to operate the unit (p.120). This key
lights up in orange after pressed.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
BAND
PRESET
TUNING
Switches between FM and AM radio.
Select a preset station.
Select the radio frequency.
AV
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
V-AUX
4
External device operation keys
AUDIO
Let you play back and perform other operations for external
devices when an input source other than “TUNER” is
selected (p.120).
B Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.51).
3
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
RECEIVER z key
Select an input source for playback.
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
G
H
C INFO key
4
5
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.83).
D SLEEP key
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off).
E Numeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.
MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.58).
F TV operation keys
Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV
operations (p.119).
G HDMI OUT key
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output
(p.48).
H PARTY key
Turns on/off the party mode (p.82).
I VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
J MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
K OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.84).
L DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.83).
M CODE SET key
Registers remote control codes of external devices on the
remote control (p.119).
SCENE
AV 1–7
V-AUX
AV 1–7 jacks
VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
AUDIO 1–4 AUDIO 1–4 jacks
PHONO
MULTI
USB
PHONO jacks
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
MULTI CH INPUT jacks
USB jack (on the front panel)
NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a
desired network source)
FM/AM radio
6
I
J
K
NET
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
7
8
TUNER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch
Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by
the remote control (p.81).
ENTER
9
5 SCENE keys
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
L
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.49).
:
A
TUNING
PRESET
6 PROGRAM keys
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Select a sound program (p.51).
7 External device operation keys
Select menus for external devices (p.120).
8 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
9 Menu operation keys
MOVIE
INFO
1
MUSIC
SLEEP
2
B
C
D
E
3
7
4
8
5
6
MEMORY
9
0
10
ENT
TV
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
INPUT
MUTE
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
F
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.
M
0 MODE key
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.66).
(U.S.A. model only) Selects an HD Radio audio program
(p.59).
• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.119).
FEATURES
➤
Part names and functions
En 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATIONS
Basic speaker configuration (p.15)
1
Connecting speakers (p.14)
Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit.
Advanced speaker configuration (p.19)
Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone
configurations to enhance the system.
Connect a TV to the unit.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Connecting a TV (p.25)
Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Connect the unit to a network.
Connecting playback devices (p.31)
Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.34)
Connecting to a network (p.35)
Connecting other devices (p.36)
Connect external devices such as recording devices.
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
Selecting an on-screen menu language
(p.39)
Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English).
8
9
Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically (YPAO) (p.40)
Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room
(YPAO).
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
PREPARATIONS
➤
General setup procedure
En 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 Connecting speakers
The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.19).
Caution
• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 ΩMIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.16).
Functions of each speaker
Speaker type Abbr.
Ideal speaker layout
Function
E
R
0.5 to 1 m
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
Front (L)
1
2
3
4
5
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds).
Front (R)
Center
Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals).
Surround (L)
Surround (R)
Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Surround speakers also
produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back
speakers are connected.
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
1
2
Surround
back (L)
6
7
E
R
3
9
9
Produce surround back right/left channel sounds.
Surround
back (R)
Front
presence (L)
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP
3D (p.54), the front presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional
sound field in your room.
Front
presence (R)
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces
bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the
unit and place them on the right/left (or front/rear) sides of the room.
Subwoofer
9
4
5
10°~30°
10°~30°
6
7
• We recommend using front presence speakers to have a full effect of the 3-dimensional sound fields.
However, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to
produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected (p.54).
30 cm (1 ft) or more
• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the
speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker
settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout.
• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”
and “SBR” in the diagram).
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Basic speaker configuration
■ Placing speakers in your room
Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples.
❑ 7.1+2-channel system
❑ 7.1-channel system
(using both surround back and front presence speakers)
(using front presence speakers)
This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy
a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a highly-natural
3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.
❑ 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers)
• The surround back speakers and front presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.52).
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to
enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
❑ 5.1-channel system
■ Setting the speaker impedance
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting
6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also
use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall
outlet.
1
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
MAIN ZONE z.
2
MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying
5.1-channel contents.
Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
3
❑ 2.1-channel system
DOCK
TAG
HD
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- ꢀSPEAKERꢀIMP.
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ8ꢀMIN
Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.
4
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the
power cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround
speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound
(Virtual CINEMA DSP).
• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)
■ Connecting speakers
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
+
–
+
–
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the
speakers.
Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the
unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,
“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
Connection diagram
Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.
Speakers to be connected
CENTER
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
1
2
Speaker system
Power Amp
The unit (rear)
(the number of channels)
ROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE
2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
Room
Speaker type Abbr.
Assign
(p.100)
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
CENTER
FRONT
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
EXTRA SP
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
BI–AMP
7+2
●
7
5
2
Front (L)
1
2
3
4
5
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Front (R)
●
SINGLE
Center
●
Surround (L)
Surround (R)
●
●
Surround
back (L)
Main zone
Basic (default)
6
7
E
R
●
●
●
●
*1
*1
*2
*2
Q
W
Surround
back (R)
1
2
Front
presence (L)
9
3
9
Front
presence (R)
If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or front
presence speakers (*2).
4
5
6
7
• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an
external power amplifier” (p.23).
• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
❑ Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the
unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire
to the positive terminal.
a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and
twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.
b Loosen the speaker terminal.
c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the
terminal.
d Tighten the terminal.
c
+
FRONT
+ (red)
b
a
d
– (black)
Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only)
a Tighten the speaker terminal.
b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
+
FRONT
a
Banana plug
b
❑ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
Audio pin cable
PRE OUT
(
SINGLE
)
1
2
R
RUN
D
SUR
.
BACK
SUB
WOOFER
CENTER
CENTER
FR
O
NT
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Advanced speaker configuration
In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.15), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.
Combining with an external
Using the four internal
amplifiers for front speakers to
have more high-quality sounds
Using the excess internal
amplifiers for stereo speakers
in another room
power amplifier (Hi-Fi
amplifier, etc.) to build an
extended system
Bi-amp connection
Power-amp channel expansion
Multi-zone configuration
(Example)
(Example)
(Example)
External power
amplifier
Bi-amp
connection
Zone2
Main zone
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
❑ 5ch BI-AMP
■ Available speaker configurations
Main zone
Bi-amp
External
power
amplifier
(required)
Power Amp Assign
(p.100)
Output
channel
(max)
Multi-zone
Page
1
2
Bi-amp
3
9
9
5
7
7
5ch BI-AMP
5ch BI-AMP +SB
7ch +1ZONE
20
21
21
Surround
back
+1 (Zone2)
4
5
• When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.100)
in the “Setup” menu.
Speaker
12
3
Connect to
FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection)
CENTER
45
67
ER
9
SURROUND
(not used)
(not used)
SUBWOOFER 1–2
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
❑ 5ch BI-AMP +SB
❑ 7ch +1ZONE
Bi-amp
1
9
2
1
2
1
2
3
9
3
9
9
4
5
4
5
6
7
6
7
Zone2
Main zone
via external amp
Speaker
12
Connect to
Speaker
12
3
Connect to
FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection)
FRONT
3
CENTER
CENTER
45
67
ER
9
SURROUND
45
67
ER
9
SURROUND
SUR.BACK (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
SURROUND BACK
(not used)
(not used)
SUBWOOFER 1–2
SUBWOOFER 1–2
EXTRA SP
Zone2 speakers
• When Zone2 output is enabled (p.81), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
■
Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections
■ Connecting Zone2 speakers
When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the
When using Zone2 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP terminals.
To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, configure the “Power Amp
Assign” setting (p.100) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC
wall outlet.
To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.100) in the
“Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
The unit (rear)
The unit (rear)
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
CENTER
FRONT
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
EXTRA SP
SURROUND
CENTER
FRONT
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
EXTRA SP
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
BI–AMP
BI–AMP
SINGLE
SINGLE
1
2
FL
FR
9
3
9
4
5
1
2
6
7
3
Zone2
9
9
Main zone
4
5
• You can also connect Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier (p.79).
Caution
• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp
connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
cables.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(Example)
■ Connecting an external power amplifier
Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier
When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker
output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit.
The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks
RS-232C
4
AV
5
AV
6
AV
7
Main input jack
TRIGGER
OUT
1
REMOTE
IN OUT
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
PB
PR
MAIN IN
Caution
PR
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
1
2
• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making
connections.
L
L
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.
R
R
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK
AC IN
CENTER
FRONT
L
R
L
Amplifier with
volume control
bypass
– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS
terminals.
FRONT
SUR
– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of
the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to
the pre-main amplifier.
(such as A-S2000)
SINGLE
The unit (rear)
The unit (rear)
HDMI
AV
RS-232C
3
4
AV
5
AV
6
AV
7
TRIGGER
OUT
PR
C
1
REMOTE
IN OUT
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
Y
PB
PR
2
D
12V
0.1A
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
1
2
ZONE
2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK
AC IN
CENTER
FRONT
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
EXTRA SP
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
BI–AMP
SINGLE
1 23
4
About external power amplifiers
1 FRONT jacks
Output front channel sounds.
We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.
• With unbalanced inputs
2 SURROUND jacks
Output surround channel sounds.
• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)
• Output power: about 100 W (6 to 8 Ω)
3 SUR. BACK jacks
Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect
the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).
4 CENTER jack
Outputs center channel sounds.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input/output jacks and cables
■ Video/audio jacks
■ Video jacks
■ Audio jacks
❑ HDMI jacks
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
❑ OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
Transmit video signals separated into three
components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB),
and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video
cable with three plugs.
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.
AV 1
HDMI cable
Digital optical cable
Component video cable
COMPONEN
AV 1
A
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.
❑ COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
❑ S VIDEO jack
Transmits S-video signals that include luminance (Y)
and chrominance (C) components. Use an S-video
cable.
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K video transmission features.
Digital coaxial cable
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K videos.
S-video cable
❑ AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable.
Stereo pin cable
❑ VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
Video pin cable
AV
1
PREPARATIONS
➤
Input/output jacks and cables
En 24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2 Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
■
Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable.
The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks
available on your TV.
Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.106) in the “Setup” menu.
Yes
• HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
• Use an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
Does your TV support
Audio Return Channel (ARC)?
■ Connection Method 1 (p.25)
HDMI OUT 1 jack
No
HDMI OUT
1
2
ARC
The unit (rear)
HDMI
Yes
Does your TV support
DC OUT
NETWORK
HDMI input
(ARC-compatible)
(
3
NET
)
HDOUT
5V
0.5A
AV
1
1
2
HDMI Control?
(1 BD/D
ARC
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
PB
AV
A
1
2
HDMI
ARC
No
AV
B
AUDIO
(2 TV)
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
HDMI
L
Yes
R
Does your TV have an
HDMI input jack?
FRONT
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
■ Connection Method 3 (p.28)
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
RADIO)
AM
FM
75Ω
No
TV
■ Connection Method 4 (p.29)
About HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV
that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback
devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the
unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.137).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,
regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”
(p.136).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.30).
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a
TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you
can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting a TV
En 25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
❑ Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings.
Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
3
a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD player).
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.
c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power.
d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices)
and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
1
Configure the settings of the unit.
2
e Check the following.
a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV.
b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
c Press ON SCREEN.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
OPTION
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
This completes the necessary settings.
RETURN
DISPLAY
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
d Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.106) in the “Setup” menu is set
to “On”.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.106) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio
cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.27).
e Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1
jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.106) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.49), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
g Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
h Press ON SCREEN.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting a TV
En 26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
❑ Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings.
■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or
stereo pin cable).
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and
playback devices.
1
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.106) in the “Setup” menu.
• HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
HDMI OUT 1 jack
Configure the settings of the unit.
2
HDMI OUT
a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
b Press ON SCREEN.
1
2
ARC
The unit (rear)
HDMI
DC OUT
NETWORK
(
3
NET
)
HDMOUT
5V
0.5A
AV
1
1
2
(1 BD/D
ARC
HDMI input
OPTION
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
PB
AV
A
1
2
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
HDMI
AV
B
AUDIO
(2 TV)
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
HDMI
L
R
RETURN
DISPLAY
AUDIO
L
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
CO
c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
L
L
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
RADIO)
AM
FM
75Ω
R
R
R
5
OPTICAL
TV
OPTICAL
O
O
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO)
jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,
regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”
(p.136).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.30).
e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
g Press ON SCREEN.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting a TV
En 27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or
stereo pin cable).
Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
3
a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD player).
HDMI OUT 1 jack
b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.
c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
e Check the following.
HDMI OUT
1
2
ARC
The unit (rear)
HDMI
DC OUT
NETWORK
(
3
NET
)
HDMOUT
5V
0.5A
AV
1
1
2
(1 BD/D
ARC
HDMI input
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
PB
AV
A
1
2
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
HDMI
AV
B
AUDIO
(2 TV)
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
HDMI
L
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
R
AUDIO
L
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
CO
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
L
L
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
RADIO)
AM
FM
75Ω
R
This completes the necessary settings.
R
R
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
5
OPTICAL
TV
OPTICAL
O
O
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO)
jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the
remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1
jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.106) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.49), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,
regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”
(p.136).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
• If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–4
jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.49), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.30).
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting a TV
En 28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
❑ S VIDEO connection (with an S-video cable)
■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks)
Depending on the video input jacks available on your TV, choose one of the following
connections.
MONITOR OUT (S VIDEO) jack
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the
remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
The unit (rear)
S
Video input (S-video)
DC OUT
NETWORK
(
3
NET
)
5V
0.5A
AC
S VIDEO
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
AV
A
1
2
• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV.
S
AV
B
AUDIO
(2 TV)
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
L
AUDIO
L
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
R
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXI
L
L
• If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–4
jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.49), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
R
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
R
R
RADIO)
AM
FM
75Ω
TV
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)
5
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
O
O
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO)
jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
Y
PB
PR
P
R
B
The unit (rear)
P
HDMI OUT
AV
1
1
2
Y
(1 BD/DV
ARC
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
PB
Y
AV
3
4
PB
PR
C
D
AV
A
1
2
REM
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
Y
PB
PR
Video input
IN
AV
B
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack
(component video)
AV
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
AUDIO
(2 TV)
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
COMPONENT VIDEO
V
Y
PB
PR
P
R
B
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE
2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
CE
R
L
R
L
P
The unit (rear)
Video input (S-video)
Y
DC OUT
NETWORK
(
3
NET
)
5V
0.5A
AC
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
SINGLE
AV
A
1
2
V
AV
B
L
L
AUDIO
(2 TV)
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
L
R
AUDIO
L
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
R
R
R
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXI
L
L
TV
5
OPTICAL
R
OPTICAL
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
R
R
RADIO)
AM
FM
75Ω
O
O
TV
5
OPTICAL
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
OPTICAL
O
O
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO)
jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting a TV
En 29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
■ Connecting another TV or a projector
The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit
with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching
videos with the remote control (p.48).
HDMI OUT 2 jack
HDMI OUT
1
2
ARC
TV
The unit (rear)
HDMI
DC OUT
NETWORK
(
3
NET
)
HDOUT
5V
0.5A
AV
1
1
2
(1 BD/D
ARC
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
PB
AV
A
1
2
AV
B
AUDIO
(2 TV)
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
L
R
HDMI
FRONT
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
HDMI input
HDMI
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
RADIO)
AM
FM
75Ω
Projector
TV (already connected)
• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting a TV
En 30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback device connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3 Connecting playback devices
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
■ Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the
unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
• Connecting an iPod (p.64)
• Connecting a USB storage device (p.68)
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Video
Audio
Digital optical
Digital coaxial
Analog stereo
AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)
AV 3–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
AV 1–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.
Component video
AV 1–4
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
• Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than
HDMI.
Y
PB
P
R
PR
PB
Y
The unit (rear)
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.111) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ,
D ), COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source.
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
NETWORK
(
3
NET
)
HD
1
ARC
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
PB
Y
AV
3
4
PB
PR
C
AV
A
1
2
Video output
(component video)
AV
B
D
AV
• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.87) in the “Option” menu.
AUDIO
(2 TV)
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE
L
R
Y
PB
PR
PR
PB
Y
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE
2
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
SURROUND
R
L
AA
O)
HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks
The unit (rear)
C
C
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
HDMI
Video device
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV
5
AV
6
AV
7
2
O
O
(1 BD/DVD)
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
TRIG
OU
Y
PB
Y
AV
3
4
PB
PR
C
D
L
REMOTE
IN OUT
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
Y
PB
PR
HDMI output
L
L
AV
12V
HDMI
AUDIO
4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
1
2
R
HDMI
R
R
HDMI
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE
2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
CENTER
FRONT
R
L
R
L
R
L
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
SINGLE
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
Video device
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting playback devices
En 31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback device connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
■ S-video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an S-video cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video
Audio
Video
Audio
Digital coaxial
Digital optical
Analog stereo
AV 1–2 (S VIDEO + COAXIAL)
AV 3–4 (S VIDEO + OPTICAL)
AV 1–4 (S VIDEO + AUDIO)
Digital coaxial
Digital optical
Analog stereo
AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
AV 3–4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
S-video
Composite video
The unit (rear)
The unit (rear)
AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks
AV 1–4
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
NETWORK
DC OUT
NETWORK
(
3
NET
)
(
3
NET
)
5V
0.5A
(S VIDEO) jacks
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV O
AV OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
(1 BD/DVD)
Video output
(S-video)
V
Video output
(composite video)
S
L
L
R
R
VIDEO
S
V
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4 OPTICAL
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4 OPTICAL
S VIDEO
ANNA(
ANA(4
DIO)
RADIO)
C
C
O
C
C
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
Video device
Video device
O
O
O
L
L
L
L
L
L
R
R
R
R
R
R
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting playback devices
En 32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback device connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
PHONO jacks
PHONO
Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.
Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the
following connections.
Audio output
(PHONO)
GND
GND
Ground lead
The unit
(rear)
PHONO
L
L
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.111) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL
(c, d, e) jacks to another input source.
DC OUT
L
L
HDMI OUT
5V
0.5A
AV
1
1
2
(1 BD/
ARC
R
R
PHONO
GND
AV
RMONITOR
R
T
OUT/
(1 BD/D
Y
PB
E OUT
Turntable
AV
A
1
2
AV
B
AUDIO
(2 TV)
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.87) in the “Option” menu.
L
R
FRONT
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
Audio output jacks on audio device
Audio output jacks on the unit
AV 1–2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL)
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
RADIO)
AM
Digital optical
FM
75Ω
C
O
C
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)
COAXIAL
Digital coaxial
Audio device
O
OPTICAL
AV 1–4 (AUDIO)
L
Analog stereo
AUDIO 1–4 (AUDIO)
L
L
Turntable (PHONO)
PHONO
R
R
R
Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4
Audio output
(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks (any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 or PHONO on the remote
control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
When connecting a turntable
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting playback devices
En 33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback device connections
FM/AM antenna connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas
Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect devices such as game consoles and
camcorders to the unit.
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on
the unit.
• The supplied antennas and the location of the antenna jacks vary depending on the region of
purchase.
The unit (front)
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
FM
AM
TUNING
ENTER
ZONE
2
ZONE CONTROL
RETURN
DISPLAY
FM antenna
AM antenna
PHONES
VIDEO AUX
YPAO MIC
USB
SILENT CINEMA
5V
2.1A
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
HDMI IN
HDMI
V
L
R
O
DC OUT
NETWORK
HDMI
AV
(
3
NET
)
HDMI OUT
5V
0.5A
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
4
AV
5
1
2
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
PB
Y
AV
3
4
PB
PR
C
D
AV
A
1
2
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
Y
PB
PR
AV
B
AV
AUDIO
(2 TV)
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT (SI
L
R
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE
2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
R
L
R
L
Game console
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
RADIO)
AM
FM
75Ω
SINGLE
The unit (rear)
Camcorder
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the
video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.
• You need to prepare a cable that match the output jacks on your device.
• If you connect video devices to both the HDMI IN jack and analog video/audio jacks, the unit outputs
video/audio input through the HDMI IN jack.
• When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack are output
from the HDMI OUT and MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jacks.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting the FM/AM antennas
En 34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM antenna connections
Network connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Assembling the AM antenna
5 Connecting to a network
(U.S.A. model)
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).
Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
Internet
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
WAN
LAN
PC
Modem
(Other models)
Router
Network cable
DC OUT
NETWORK
HDMI
AV
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
(
3
NET
)
HDMI OUT
5V
0.5A
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
4
1
2
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
PB
Y
AV
3
4
PB
PR
C
D
AV
A
1
2
MO
Y
AV
B
AV
AUDIO
(2 TV)
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE OUT
L
R
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE
2
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
SURROUND
R
L
R
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
RADIO)
AM
FM
The unit (rear)
75Ω
Connecting the AM antenna
Hold down
Insert
Release
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,
as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to
configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network
parameters manually (p.107).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.115) in the “Information” menu.
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting to a network
En 35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output
6 Connecting other devices
You can connect an analog multi-channel output device such as a DVD player and an
SACD player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
Connecting recording devices
The unit (rear)
ORK
(
3
NET
)
HDMI OUT
You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks
output video/audio signals selected as the input.
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
1
2
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
PB
Y
AV
3
4
PB
P
C
D
AV
A
1
2
AV
B
AV
AUDIO
(2 TV)
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
• The AV OUT jacks cannot output video/audio signals input through the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks.
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZON
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
• Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.
SURROUND
R
L
Channel output
(Center)
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
AV OUT jacks
Video/audio input
ENNA(4
Radio
RADIO)
AM
VIDEO
AV OUT
The unit (rear)
(Subwoofer)
V
V
DC OUT
NETWORK
(
3
NET
)
5V
0.5A
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
S VIDEO
AUDIO
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
M
(1 BD/DVD)
S
S
(Surround
back)
L
MULTI CH
INPUT jacks
AUDIO
(2
L
R
L
L
L
L
Device with analog
multi-channel output
R
Video/audio
recording device
(Surround)
(Front)
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICA
R
R
R
R
L
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
RADIO)
AM
FM
75Ω
OPTICAL
R
O
O
If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source by pressing MULTI on the remote control,
the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.
• You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using
“Video Out” (p.90) in the “Input” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection.
• Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing
speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker
configuration.
• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are
not available.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting other devices
En 36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Connecting a device that supports
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function
SCENE link playback (remote connection)
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the
unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the
trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks.
If you have a Yamaha product that supports SCENE control signal transmission, you
can operate it remotely by connecting it to the REMOTE OUT jack, using a monaural
mini-jack cable, and linking with the SCENE function (p.49).
TRIGGER OUT
1–2 jacks
The unit
(rear)
REMOTE OUT jack
The unit (rear)
TRIGGER
MI
RS-232C
OUT
AV
4
AV
5
AV
6
AV
7
R
AV
6
AV
7
1
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
REMOTE
IN OUT
IN
OUT
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
Y
PB
PR
1
REMOTE
OUT
2
2
UT
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
1
2
12V
0.1A
12V
0.1A
LE)
1
Remote input
System connection
input
2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
FRONT
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
EXTRA SP
CK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
REMOTE
IN
R
L
R
L
R
L
BI–AMP
AC IN
CENTER
FRONT
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP
R
L
R
L
EXTRA SP
Yamaha product
(such as a DVD player)
SINGLE
Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection
• If you connect a Yamaha product that supports the SCENE link playback function to the REMOTE OUT
jack, you can remotely start playback on it by linking with a scene selection (p.49). To enable the SCENE
link playback function, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.92) in the “Scene” menu.
• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.112) in the
“Setup” menu.
• You can also connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to operate devices in the main zone from Zone2
(p.80).
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting other devices
En 37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power cable connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7 Connecting the power cable
Before connecting the power cable (General model only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.
Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a
potential fire hazard.
The unit (rear)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
RS-232C
AV
5
AV
6
AV
7
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
TRIGGER
OUT
220V-
240V
1
REMOTE
IN OUT
OUT
PR
110V-
120V
2
12V
0.1A
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
1
2
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
AC IN
CK
L
CENTER
FRONT
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
EXTRA SP
R
L
R
L
BI–AMP
SINGLE
After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit
and then to an AC wall outlet.
The unit (rear)
RS-232C
AV
6
AV
7
TRIGGER
OUT
1
REMOTE
OUT
2
12V
0.1A
LE)
1
2
CK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
AC IN
CENTER
FRONT
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
EXTRA SP
R
L
R
L
BI–AMP
To an AC wall outlet
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting the power cable
En 38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language setting
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SOURCE
RECEIVER
8 Selecting an on-screen menu language
RECEIVER z
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English
(default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian and
Chinese.
V-AUX
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
UDI
6
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
7
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
1
2
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
Press ON SCREEN.
3
4
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON SCREEN
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
MEMORY
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and
the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
language.
TV VOL
TV CH
5
CODE SET
PREPARATIONS
➤
Selecting an on-screen menu language
En 39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic speaker setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SOURCE
RECEIVER
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
RECEIVER z
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.
V-AUX
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening
position (same height as your ears) and connect it
to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
UDI
5
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
YPAO MIC
jack
The unit (front)
YPAO MIC
• Please note the following when using YPAO.
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
– Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.
– During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that
the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function
at night when it may be a nuisance to others.
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
– During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.
– During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.
– Do not connect headphones.
1
2
ON
OPTION
SCREEN
ENTER
3
9
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
1
2
TUNING
PRESET
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
YPAO
microphone
4
5
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
3
Ear height
MEMORY
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
Place the YPAO microphone at
your listening position (same height
as your ears). We recommend the
use of a tripod as a microphone
stand. You can use the tripod
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
CODE SET
VOLUME
9
screws to stabilize the microphone.
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
According to your speaker configuration, configure
the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.100) in the
“Setup” menu.
4
For the basic speaker configuration (p.15): set to “Basic”
(default).
For any of the advanced speaker configurations (p.19): set
to the appropriate setting.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic speaker setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
The following screen appears on the TV.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to
enjoy surround sound in a wider space.
V-AUX
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening
position you will be seated most frequently.
UDI
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
Multi measure
(5 listening positions)
Single measure
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
CENE
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting
the measurement.
d
e
a
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
bac
ON
SCREEN
If desired, change the measuring method
(multi/single).
OPTION
6
Cursor keys
a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER.
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.
Multi measure
Multi measure
(1 listening position + front/back/left/right) (2 listening positions + front/back)
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
MEMORY
10
ENT
b
a
d
c
d
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
c
e
a
b
CODE SET
Settings
Select this option if you will have several listening
positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound.
You can take measurements at up to 8 different
positions in the room. The speaker settings will be
Yes
This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
measurement.
optimized to suit the area defined by those positions
(multi measure).
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:
Select this option if your listening position will always be
fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The
“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.43)
No (default)
speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position
(single measure).
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.42)
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic speaker setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Measuring at one listening position
SOURCE
RECEIVER
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
2
3
(single measure)
V-AUX
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for
measurement.
UDI
To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
measurement process (about 3 minutes).
CENE
• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
1
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
OPTION
SCREEN
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
TUNING
PRESET
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
4
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Caution
MEMORY
10
ENT
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.46) or “Warning messages” (p.47).
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.44).
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic speaker setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Measuring at multiple listening positions
SOURCE
RECEIVER
When the measurements at the positions you want
to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to
select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
3
(multi measure)
V-AUX
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for
measurement.
UDI
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening
positions, the following screen appears automatically.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening positions.
CENE
• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.46) or “Warning messages” (p.47).
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
1
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
OPTION
SCREEN
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
Cursor keys
ENTER
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.44).
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
TUNING
PRESET
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement at the first position finishes.
4
5
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
To save the measurement result, use the cursor
keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
MEMORY
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening
position and press ENTER.
2
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions
(up to 8) have been taken.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic speaker setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SOURCE
RECEIVER
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
6
2
3
Polarity of each speaker
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
V-AUX
Normal: The speaker cable is connected with the
UDI
Wiring
Size
correct polarity (+/-).
Caution
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
CENE
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Checking the measurement results
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
Distance
Level
Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Output level adjustment for each speaker
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
After the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Result” and press ENTER.
1
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
• A speaker with a problem is indicated with a message enclosed in a red box.
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.98) in the “Setup” menu,
which displays the previous measurement results.
To finish checking the results and return to the
previous screen, press RETURN.
TUNING
PRESET
The following screen appears.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
MEMORY
10
1
ENT
2
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
3
1 Measurement result items
2 Measurement result details
3 The number of measured positions (when multi
measure is performed)
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic speaker setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
SOURCE
RECEIVER
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings
and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
V-AUX
UDI
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto
Setup”, and then “Result” (p.97).
1
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
CENE
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and
press ENTER.
2
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
3
MEMORY
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic speaker setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
Error message
Cause
Remedy
E-1: No Front SP
E-2: No Sur. SP
E-3: No F.PRNS SP
Front speakers are not detected.
One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.
One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.
When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the
on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.
E-4: SBR → SBL
E-5: Noisy
A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.
The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.
E-6: Check Sur.
E-7: No MIC
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.
The YPAO microphone has been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.
E-8: No Signal
The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.
E-9: User Cancel
The measurement has been canceled.
An internal error has occurred.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact
the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
E-10: Internal Error
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic speaker setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
Warning message
W-1: Out of Phase
Cause
Remedy
Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.44) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by
“Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity
(+/-).
A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.44) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80
ft) of the listening position.
W-2: Over Distance
W-3: Level Error
Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the
subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as
possible.
There are significant volume differences between the
speakers.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
PLAYBACK
Basic playback procedure
Input selection keys
Selecting an HDMI output jack
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.
1
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MUTE
Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
CENE
1
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
2
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be
used for signal output changes.
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
VOLUME
DOCK
TAG
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
3
HD
HDMIꢀOUTꢀSel.
ꢀꢀꢀOUTꢀ1+2
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
PL
L
C
R
PR
ON SCREEN
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.
ENTER
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
Cursor keys
ENTER
OUT 1+2
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
OUT 1
OUT 2
Off
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.57)
• Playing back iPod music (p.64)
Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.68)
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.71)
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.49).
MEMORY
10
• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest
resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For
example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p
TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
ENT
• Listening to Internet radio (p.74)
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
(p.76)
CODE SET
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
4
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or
TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.85).
On-screen input selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and
press ENTER.
PLAYBACK
➤
Basic playback procedure
En 48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
V-AUX
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.
You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.
UDI
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
Press SCENE.
1
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
SCENE
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
Input
1 (BD/DVD)
AV 1
2 (TV)
AUDIO 1
Auto
3 (NET)
NET RADIO
—
4 (RADIO)
TUNER
—
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON SCREEN
Input (p.48)
OPTION
Audio Select (p.87)
HDMI Output (p.48)
Sound Program (p.51)
Enhancer (p.56)
Auto
Cursor keys
ENTER
HDMI Output
OUT 1+2
Sci-Fi
OUT 1+2
STRAIGHT
Auto
OUT 1+2
7ch Stereo
Auto
OUT 1+2
7ch Stereo
Auto
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
Mode
Auto
TUNING
PRESET
Off
On
On
On
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
• You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control.
Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes
from the “Scene” menu (p.91).
MEMORY
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
On-screen scene selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press
ENTER.
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
En 49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE
Configuring scene assignments
Selecting setting items to be included as
scene assignments
SOURCE
RECEIVER
Set the unit to the condition (such as input source
1
In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output
and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the
scene assignments in “Detail” (p.93) in the “Scene” menu.
and sound program) that you want to assign to a
scene.
Input selection keys
Sound
Tone Control, Adaptive DRC
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
2
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue
Level, Subwoofer Trim, Extended Surround
SCENE
Surround
1
2
3
4
SCENE
DOCK
TAG
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
Video
Video Mode
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀSCENE1
ꢀSETꢀComplete
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Volume
Master Volume
MUTE
VOLUME
3
PROGRAM
HD
Lipsync
Lipsync, Delay
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
Speaker Setup
Setting Pattern, PEQ Select
If you want to control the corresponding playback
device after selecting the scene, hold down the
corresponding SCENE key and input selection key
together for more than 3 seconds.
3
ON
OPTION
SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see
“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.120) to register it.
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external
device connected to the unit via HDMI or of a Yamaha product connected to the
REMOTE OUT jack. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device type in
“Device Control” (p.92) in the “Scene” menu.
MEMORY
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
En 50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
Selecting the sound mode
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).
V-AUX
On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
UDI
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press
ENTER.
Selecting a sound program suitable for movies (p.52)
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround
Press MOVIE repeatedly.
decoder and press ENTER.
Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo
playback (p.53)
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM.
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in
the “Sound Program” menu (p.94).
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON SCREEN
Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
OPTION
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
Switching to the straight decode mode (p.54)
• When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the
straight decode mode (p.54) is automatically selected.
Cursor keys
ENTER
Press STRAIGHT.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.10) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in
the “Information” menu (p.114).
Switching to the Pure Direct mode (p.55)
Press PURE DIRECT.
TUNING
PRESET
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
Enable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.56)
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT
Press ENHANCER.
MEMORY
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the sound mode
En 51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP)
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for
long periods.
Drama
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie
theaters or concert halls in your room.
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.
Mono Movie
Sound program category
DOCK
❑ ENTERTAINMENT
TAG
HD
ꢀꢀMOVIE
MOVIEꢀTHEATER
ꢀꢀꢀꢀSci-Fi
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.
Sports
“CINEMA DSP” lights up Sound program
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Action Game
❑ MOVIE THEATER
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Roleplaying Game of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.
Standard
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.
Music Video
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence
sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation
of the sounds and the separation of the channels.
Adventure
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the sound mode
En 52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
❑ CLASSICAL
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500
seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful
Hall in Munich
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
Hall in Vienna
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
Chamber
❑ LIVE/CLUB
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Roxy Theatre
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
❑ STEREO
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
2ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.
7ch Stereo
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the sound mode
En 53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields
Enjoying unprocessed playback
SOURCE
RECEIVER
(CINEMA DSP 3D)
V-AUX
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
UDI
CINEMA DSP 3D creates a natural stereoscopic sound field in your
room.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
CINEMA DSP 3D functions when both of the following conditions
are met.
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.
CENE
• One of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is
selected (p.52).
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
• “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.85) in the “Option” menu is set to
“On”.
Press STRAIGHT.
1
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.
DOCK
ON
TAG
HD
ꢀꢀMUSIC
OPTION
SCREEN
ꢀꢀCLASSICAL
HallꢀinꢀVienna
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
ENTER
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀꢀꢀSTRAIGHT
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
“CINEMA DSP n” lights up
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
• We recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full
effect of the stereoscopic sound fields. However, even when no front presence
speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using
the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields.
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
STRAIGHT
• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround
back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.86) in the “Option” menu to a
setting other than “Off”.
MEMORY
10
ENT
■ Enjoying sound field effects without
INPUT
MUTE
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and
7ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit
creates the surround sound field using the front-side speakers.
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the sound mode
En 54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Playing back 2-channel sources in
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)
SOURCE
RECEIVER
multichannel (surround decoder)
V-AUX
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel
playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is
input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.
UDI
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.133).
Press PURE DIRECT.
1
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
1
Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is
enabled or disabled.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀPUREꢀDIRECT
DOCK
TAG
HD
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PROGRAM
ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ꢀSUR.ꢀDECODE
ꢀꢀꢀProꢀLogic
ENHANCER SLEEP
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
ZONE
2
HD
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all
sources.
bPro Logic
• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs
– Operating the on-screen menu
ENTER
bPLIIx Movie
bPLII Movie
bPLIIx Music
bPLII Music
bPLIIx Game
bPLII Game
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for movies.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
– Using the multi-zone function
– Output from the AV OUT jacks
TUNING
PRESET
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for music.
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
SUR.DECODE
PURE DIRECT
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for games.
MEMORY
10
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies.
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music.
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are
connected or when “Surround Back” (p.101) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“None”.
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the sound mode
En 55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
SOURCE
RECEIVER
V-AUX
UDI
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel
speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the
headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program
or a surround decoder.
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
CENE
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
Press ENHANCER.
1
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀEnhancerꢀOn
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
ENTER
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
“ENHANCER” lights up
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling
rate is over 48 kHz.
ENHANCER
MEMORY
10
• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.87) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the sound mode
En 56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
Listening to FM/AM radio
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
V-AUX
Selecting a frequency for reception
UDI
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
1
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used
in U.K. and Europe models.
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
CENE
Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.
2
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀꢀꢀFMꢀ87.50MHz
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
IN OUT
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
Setting the frequency steps
ZONE
2
SLEEP
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
3
4
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
(Asia and General models only)
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and
9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the
frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
ON
SCREEN
Use the following keys to set a frequency.
OPTION
3
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
Set the unit to standby mode.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
1
BAND
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,
press MAIN ZONE z.
PRESET
2
TUNING
DOCK
TAG
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
HD
ꢀꢀꢀFMꢀ98.50MHz
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
IN OUT
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
SLEEP
3
4
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHT
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
Numeric keys
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
INPUT
MUTE
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
PROGRAM
• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ
STEP”.
3
• (U.S.A. model only)
You can switch between “Auto” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio
reception in “Audio Mode” (p.87) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it. (HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the
monaural reception mode.)
DOCK
TAG
HD
TUNERꢀFRQꢀSTEP
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀFM50/AM9
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
IN OUT
ZONE PARTY
ZONE
2
SLEEP
3
4
1
OUT
2
3
HD
• (Except for U.S.A. model)
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.88) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it.
4
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby
mode and turn it on again.
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Selecting a preset station
Registering favorite radio stations (presets)
SOURCE
RECEIVER
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
V-AUX
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
UDI
1
source.
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
TUNER
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
2
• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals and HD
Radio stations (U.S.A. model only) by using “Auto Preset” (p.61, p.63).
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
CENE
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
■ Registering a radio station
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
DOCK
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
TAG
HD
ꢀPreset
01:FMꢀ98.50MHz
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
IN OUT
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
3
4
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.57)
3
HD
1
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
to tune into the desired radio station.
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
• (U.S.A. model only)
To register a specific HD Radio program, select an audio program (p.59)
after tuning into the radio station.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
TUNING
PRESET
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
2
• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.61, p.63).
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
Numeric keys
MEMORY
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
Preset number
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀPreset
01:FMꢀ98.50MHz
ꢀꢀPresetꢀOK
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
IN OUT
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
3
4
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a
preset number, and then press MEMORY again.
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀPreset
02:Empty
ꢀꢀꢀFMꢀ98.50MHz
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
IN OUT
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
3
4
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Selecting an HD Radio™ audio program
HD Radio™ tuning
SOURCE
RECEIVER
You can select an audio program when the unit is tuned into an HD
Radio station that provides multiple audio programs (up to 8).
V-AUX
(U.S.A. model only)
HD Radio Technology is a new technology that enables FM/AM
radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital broadcasting
provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and
reception as well as new data services. Furthermore, supplemental
program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio
programs multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further
information on HD Radio Technology, visit
UDI
Press MODE repeatedly to select a desired audio
program.
1
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
You can also enter an audio program number (1 to 8)
directly by using the numeric keys. For example, to select
program 3, press 3 and then ENT (or just leave it).
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
CENE
“http://www.ibiquity.com/”.
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀHDꢀ2/3
ꢀꢀꢀFMꢀ88.9MHz3
ꢀꢀꢀWXYZ-FM
The unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating
CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM stereo quality AM
broadcasts. In addition, the unit can receive both audio and data
(such as song titles, artist names, album titles and program types)
from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8).
TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
■ Displaying the HD Radio™ information
You can switch the HD Radio information displayed on the front display.
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
Press INFO.
1
MODE
Each time you press the key, the item switches.
Program Service Data: Contributes to the superior user experience
of HD RadioTechnology. Presents song name, artist, station IDs,
HD2/HD3 Channel Guide, and other relevant data streams.
PRESET
TUNING
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
DOCK
TAG
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM channels.
These HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, original music as well as
deep cuts into traditional genre.
HD
Info
ꢀꢀꢀCategory
TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
INFO
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables local radio
stations to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM sounds like today?s
FM and FM sounds like a CD.
Item name
Numeric keys
ENT
About 3 seconds later, the information is displayed.
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
DOCK
TAG
HD
CODE SET
FMꢀ88.9-1 ꢀꢀꢀWXYZ-FM
When tuning into an HD Radio station
TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Relative/total program number
(when multiple programs are available)
3
HD
RhythmꢀandꢀBlu
Station Info
Category
Frequency, station name (call sign)
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀHDꢀ1/3
ꢀꢀꢀFMꢀ88.9MHz1
ꢀꢀꢀWXYZ-FM
TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
Station name (call sign), program category
Station name (call sign), artist name/song title
Station name (call sign), album title
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
Artist/Song
Album
“HD” lights up
Absolute program number
(when multiple programs are available)
DSP Program
Audio Decoder
Frequency, sound program selected on the unit
Frequency, decoder selected on the unit
• The unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital FM/AM radio stations. If
you cannot search the desired all-digital HD Radio station by holding down
TUNING, enter the frequency directly using the numeric keys.
• When the unit is in the monaural reception mode (p.87), you can tune into the
analog part of a hybrid HD Radio station only.
• Some audio programs may not provide information depending on the station
or period of time.
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
When tuning into an HD Radio station, the selected audio program
number and HD Radio information (station name [call sign], program
category, artist name, album name and song title) are also displayed.
Use the cursor keys to select HD Radio information to be scrolled.
■ Holding HD Radio™ information display
SOURCE
RECEIVER
You can hold the HD Radio information currently displayed on the
TV (playback screen) and front display by using the hold function.
V-AUX
UDI
When the desired HD Radio information is
displayed, press OPTION.
1
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
3 HD indicator
Lights up when an HD Radio station signal is received.
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Use the cursor keys to select “Hold/Unhold”
(Hold/Unhold) and press ENTER.
2
4 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
CENE
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
The current information will remain displayed until
“Hold/Unhold” is selected again.
5 Operation menu
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
• The hold function is automatically disabled if the unit is set to standby mode
or if another input source or another radio station is selected.
Menu
Submenu
FM
Function
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
Switches to FM/AM.
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
3
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
AM
RETURN
Tuning (+/-)
Auto (+/-)
Selects a frequency.
TUNING
PRESET
■ Operating HD Radio™ on the TV
You can view the HD Radio information or select a radio station on
the TV.
Selects a radio station automatically.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
Manual Tuning
Selects an audio program (when
Program (+/-) multiple audio programs are
available).
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
1
MEMORY
10
Registers the selected station as
ENT
Memory
presets.
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
Direct
Enters a frequency directly.
CODE SET
Moves to the browse screen (preset
station list).
❑ Playback screen
Browse
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
1
2
3
4
5
Screen Off
1 HOLD indicator
Flashes when the hold function (p.60) is enabled.
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Browse screen
Radio Data System tuning
SOURCE
RECEIVER
V-AUX
(U.K. and Europe models only)
1
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.
UDI
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
3
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
2
CENE
■
Displaying the Radio Data System information
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1 Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys to select a preset
station and press ENTER to tune into it.
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
1
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
2 Preset number
3 Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
ON
OPTION
SCREEN
• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.63).
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
Press INFO.
2
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
RETURN
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
Menu
Submenu
Function
TUNING
PRESET
TAG
HD
Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Info
ꢀProgramꢀType
Memory
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
IN OUT
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
ZONE
2
SLEEP
3
4
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
INFO
Automatically registers HD Radio
(FM/AM) stations and FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
Item name
Auto Preset
Clear Preset
Utility
MEMORY
10
ENT
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
INPUT
MUTE
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
Frequency (always displayed)
Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
DOCK
TAG
1 Page Up
HD
ꢀꢀꢀFMꢀ98.50MHz
ꢀꢀꢀCLASSICS
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
IN OUT
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
Moves to the previous/next page of the
ZONE
2
SLEEP
3
4
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
list.
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
1 Page Down
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Information
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
Screen Off
Program Service Program service name
Program Type
Radio Text
Current program type
Information on the current program
Current time
Clock Time
• If HD Radio stations are detected by “Auto Preset”, only the audio program 1
(HD1) will be registered. If you want to register a specific HD Radio program,
register it manually (p.58).
DSP Program
Audio Decoder
Sound mode name
Decoder name
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the radio on the TV
SOURCE
RECEIVER
• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.
V-AUX
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the
TV.
UDI
• (U.S.A. model only)
See “Operating HD Radio™ on the TV” (p.60) to operate the radio on the TV.
■ Receiving traffic information
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
automatically
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit
automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,
follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.
CENE
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
1
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
1
■ Playback screen
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”
(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.
OPTION
2
3
1
2
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.
Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
4
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor
keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
• To cancel the search, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
1 Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
MEMORY
10
The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the
search finishes.
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
(U.K. and Europe models only)
DOCK
TAG
HD
Finished
TrafficProgram
TPꢀFM101.30MHz
When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.61), the
Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”
“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
IN OUT
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
3
4
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
Traffic information station (frequency)
2 Band icon
(Except for U.K. and Europe models)
Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM.
• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information
stations are found.
3 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
4 Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Browse screen
Menu
Submenu
FM
Function
SOURCE
RECEIVER
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Switches to FM/AM.
V-AUX
AM
1
UDI
Tuning (+/-)
Auto (+/-)
Selects a frequency.
Manual Tuning
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
Selects a radio station automatically.
3
Registers the selected station as
presets.
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Memory
Direct
2
CENE
Enters a frequency directly.
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
Moves to the browse screen (preset
station list).
Browse
1 Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys to select a preset
station and press ENTER to tune into it.
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
Screen Off
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
2 Preset number
3 Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
RETURN
Menu
Submenu
Function
TUNING
PRESET
Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Memory
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
Automatically registers FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
Auto Preset
Clear Preset
Utility
MEMORY
10
ENT
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
1 Page Down
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
Screen Off
• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing back iPod music
You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable
supplied with the iPod.
Connecting an iPod
Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the
iPod.
• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,
depending on the model or software version of the iPod.
Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
1
• To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied)
is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite
AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack on the front panel. To
select a video, operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.66).
Supported iPods (as of April 2012)
• iPod touch, iPod nano (2nd gen. to 6th gen.)
• iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone
• iPad2, iPad
Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
2
The unit (front)
PROGRAM
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
PHONES
YPAO MIC
USB
SILENT
5V
2.1A
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀUSB
ꢀꢀConnected
PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby
mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If
“Network Standby” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to
charge without limit.
• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back iPod music
En 64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Browse screen
Playback of iPod content
SOURCE
RECEIVER
V-AUX
Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.
1
2
UDI
You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
3
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
NET
USB
5
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
1
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
4
CENE
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1 Status indicators
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.67) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
2 List name
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
3 Contents list
Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
RETURN
• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.
TUNING
PRESET
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
selection.
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
2
Menu
Function
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
10 Pages Down
Return
MEMORY
10
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
Returns to the higher-level list.
Moves to the playback screen.
Now Playing
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
Screen Off
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the
simple play mode (p.66).
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back iPod music
En 65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Playback screen
■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control
SOURCE
RECEIVER
(simple play)
V-AUX
1
2
Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
UDI
1
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
3
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.
CENE
Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to
start playback.
2
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.67) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
Operational remote control
Function
keys
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Cursor keys
ENTER
Select an item.
ON
OPTION
SCREEN
Confirms the selection.
Returns to the previous screen.
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.
RETURN
3 Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
DISPLAY
a
d
Starts playback or stops playback
temporarily.
RETURN
External device
operation keys
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
s
Stops playback.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
MODE
External device
operation keys
Menu
Submenu Function
f
g
h
j
Skips forward/backward.
a
s
Resumes playback from pause.
Stops playback.
MEMORY
10
Searches forward/backward (by holding
down).
ENT
d
Stops playback temporarily.
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
Play Control
f
g
h
j
Skips forward/backward.
Searches forward/backward (by holding
down).
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
Screen Off
• You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to
control playback.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back iPod music
En 66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Repeat/shuffle settings
SOURCE
RECEIVER
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings of your iPod.
V-AUX
UDI
• During simple play, configure the repeat/shuffle settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
1
CENE
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
2
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
3
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
Item
Setting
Function
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
Plays back songs in random order. “x”
appears in the TV screen.
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Songs (Songs)
Albums
(Albums)
Plays back albums in random order. “x”
appears in the TV screen.
MEMORY
10
ENT
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
One (One)
Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v”
appears in the TV screen.
All (All)
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
4
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back iPod music
En 67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
V-AUX
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage
device for more information.
UDI
• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
NET
USB
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or
FAT32 format).
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use.
CENE
• The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC
files (1- or 2-channel audio only).
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 96 kHz for WAV and FLAC files,
and 48 kHz for other files.
Playback of USB storage device contents
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer
of the USB storage device.
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
OPTION
SCREEN
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.
ENTER
Connecting a USB storage device
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
1
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
TUNING
PRESET
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
1
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
The unit (front)
PROGRAM
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
MEMORY
10
PHONES
YPAO MIC
ENT
USB
SILENT
INPUT
MUTE
5V
2.1A
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
USB
• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
USB storage device
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀUSB
PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
En 68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Browse screen
SOURCE
RECEIVER
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
2
V-AUX
1
2
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
UDI
3
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
5
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
4
CENE
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1 Status indicators
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.70) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
2 List name
ON
OPTION
SCREEN
3 Contents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
RETURN
TUNING
PRESET
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
selection.
Menu
Function
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
10 Pages Down
Return
MEMORY
10
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
Returns to the higher-level list.
Moves to the playback screen.
Now Playing
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
Screen Off
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
En 69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Playback screen
■ Repeat/shuffle settings
SOURCE
RECEIVER
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.
V-AUX
1
2
UDI
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
1
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
OPTION.
3
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
2
CENE
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.70) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
ON
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
3
SCREEN
OPTION
Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
Item
Setting
Function
3 Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
MODE
DISPLAY
RETURN
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order. “x” appears on
the TV screen.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
External device
operation keys
On (On)
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Menu
Submenu
a
Function
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
Resumes playback from pause.
Stops playback.
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
One (One)
s
Repeat
(Repeat)
MEMORY
10
Play Control
d
Stops playback temporarily.
ENT
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the
TV screen.
All (All)
INPUT
MUTE
f
g
TV VOL
TV CH
Skips forward/backward.
CODE SET
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
4
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
Screen Off
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
En 70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
V-AUX
You can play back music files stored on your PC or
Playback of PC music contents
DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
UDI
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router
(p.35). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address)
are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.115) in the “Information” menu.
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
CENE
• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC
and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only).
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1
• The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 96 kHz for WAV and FLAC files,
and 48 kHz for other files.
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing
of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Media sharing setup
Cursor keys
ENTER
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible
NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each
music server.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player
installed
• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.
MEMORY
10
ENT
Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is
installed on your PC.
1
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.
CODE SET
2
In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing
and allow media to be shared with the device.
2
■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server
software installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and
configure the media sharing settings.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
En 71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Browse screen
SOURCE
RECEIVER
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
3
V-AUX
1
2
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
UDI
3
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
5
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
4
CENE
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1 Status indicators
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.73) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
2 List name
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
3 Contents list
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
RETURN
TUNING
PRESET
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
selection.
Menu
Function
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
10 Pages Down
Return
MEMORY
10
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
Returns to the higher-level list.
Moves to the playback screen.
Now Playing
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
Screen Off
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
En 72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Playback screen
■ Repeat/shuffle settings
SOURCE
RECEIVER
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for the playback of PC
music content.
V-AUX
1
2
UDI
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
1
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
press OPTION.
3
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
2
CENE
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.73) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
ON
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
3
SCREEN
OPTION
Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
Item
Setting
Function
3 Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
MODE
DISPLAY
RETURN
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order. “x” appears on
the TV screen.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
External device
operation keys
On (On)
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Menu
Submenu
a
Function
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
Resumes playback from pause.
Stops playback.
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
One (One)
s
Repeat
(Repeat)
MEMORY
10
Play Control
d
Stops playback temporarily.
ENT
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the
TV screen.
All (All)
INPUT
MUTE
f
g
TV VOL
TV CH
Skips forward/backward.
CODE SET
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
4
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.
Screen Off
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.91).
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
En 73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
Listening to Internet radio
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
V-AUX
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
UDI
1
2
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.35). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.115) in the “Information” menu.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
CENE
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
MEMORY
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to Internet radio
En 74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Browse screen
■ Playback screen
SOURCE
RECEIVER
V-AUX
1
2
1
2
UDI
3
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
3
5
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
4
CENE
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1 Playback indicator
1 Playback indicator
2 List name
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
2 Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
3 Contents list
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
ON
3 Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
OPTION
SCREEN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
MODE
DISPLAY
RETURN
Menu
Submenu
Function
External device
operation keys
Play Control
Browse
s
Stops playback.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
Moves to the browse screen.
Menu
Function
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
10 Pages Down
Return
Screen Off
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
MEMORY
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
• You can also use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to
stop playback.
Returns to the higher-level list.
Moves to the playback screen.
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
Now Playing
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
Screen Off
• You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by
accessing the following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this
feature, you need the unit’s vTuner ID and your e-mail address in order to create
your personal account. You can find the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in
“Network” (p.115) in the “Information” menu.
http://yradio.vtuner.com/
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to Internet radio
En 75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on
the unit via network.
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music
contents on the unit.
iTunes
PC
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or
display the playback screen on the iPod.
1
Router
The unit
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon
(
) appears.
Starts playback
on iTunes
or iPod
iTunes (example)
iPod (example)
Playback starts
iPod
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same
router (p.35). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP
address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.115) in the “Information”
menu.
• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are
connected to the router properly.
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and
select the unit (network name of the unit) as the
audio output device.
2
3
• iTunes 10.2.2 or later (Windows/Mac)
• iPod touch, iPhone or iPad with iOS 4.3.3 or later
iTunes (example)
iPod (example)
Network name of the unit
Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and
starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
En 76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu
Submenu
a
Function
SOURCE
RECEIVER
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
Resumes playback from pause.
Stops playback temporarily.
V-AUX
d
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu.
Play Control
UDI
f
g
• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the
iTunes/iPod stops automatically.
Skips forward/backward.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable
volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.90) in the “Input” menu
to “Off”.
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Screen Off
CENE
• To start AirPlay playback when AirPlay from another device is ongoing, first stop
the current playback.
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
Caution
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.
the remote control to control playback.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
OPTION
SCREEN
• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to
configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers
in advance.
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
■ Playback screen
MODE
DISPLAY
iTunes (example of English version)
RETURN
External device
operation keys
1
2
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
3
MEMORY
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
1 Playback indicator
Check this box
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
3 Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
En 77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input
sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in
another room (Zone2).
Preparing Zone2
Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit. The
connection method varies depending on the amplifier being used
(the unit or an external amplifier).
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main
zone), another person can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).
Caution
• Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration,
we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center about the multi-zone connections that best meet your
requirements.
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting
speakers or an external amplifier.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or
come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit
or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will
appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
■ Using the unit’s internal amplifier
Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker
cables. For details, see “Connecting Zone2 speakers” (p.22).
Study room (Zone2)
Living room (main zone)
• Analog audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network sources
can be output to Zone2. To listen to the playback of an external device in Zone2,
you need to connect the device to the AUDIO jacks of the unit. The party mode
(p.82) allows you to play back the same audio output in main zone as Zone2,
whatever the input audio signal type.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En 78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Using an external amplifier
■ Connecting a video monitor for Zone2
Connect a video monitor for Zone2 to watch videos at Zone2.
Depending on the video input jacks available on your video
monitor, choose one of the video connection methods.
Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in
Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable.
The unit (rear)
HDMI
HDMI OUT
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
1
2
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
(ZONE 2) jacks
• To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you
need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device.
For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD player via a
component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT/ZONE
OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable.
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
UT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
PB
Y
AV
3
4
PB
PR
C
D
AV
A
1
2
MONITOR OU
P
Y
ZONE OUT
AV
B
AV
AUDIO
(2 TV)
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE OUT
L
R
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE
2
FRO
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
SPEA
SURROU
ZONE OUT jacks
(any of COMPONENT VIDEO,
VIDEO, S VIDEO)
SURROUND
R
L
R
ZONE 2
External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
Video input
(any of component video,
composite video, S-video)
Y
PB
PR
P
R
B
P
HDMI OUT
AV
5
A
1
ARC
L
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO
UT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
4
D
AV
A
1
2
REM
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
R
Y
PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
IN
P
R
B
AV
B
AV
P
AUDIO
AUDIO
(2 TV)
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
Y
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
OUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE
2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK
V
VIDEO
SURROUND
CE
R
L
R
L
V
S
SINGLE
S VIDEO
Zone2
S
The unit (rear)
Main zone
Zone2
Main zone
To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the Zone2 video
monitor, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu to
“Zone2”.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En 79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote connections between Yamaha products
■ Operating the unit from Zone2
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using
Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit
does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an
infrared signal receiver.
(remote connection)
You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2 using the
supplied remote control if you connect an infrared signal
receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
• To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.119).
REMOTE
IN
REMOTE
IN
OUT
OUT
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
The unit (rear)
Infrared signal
receiver
HDMI
V
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV
5
AV
6
AV
7
(1 BD/DVD)
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
PB
Y
AV
3
PB
PR
C
D
REMOTE
IN OUT
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
REMOTE
IN OUT
Y
PB
PR
AV
4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
1
2
Remote control
Zone2
RONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE
2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
CENTER
FRO
R
L
R
L
R
SINGLE
Infrared signal
receiver
Infrared signal
transmitter
External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control
Zone2
Main zone
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En 80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Zone2
SOURCE
RECEIVER
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
RECEIVER z
4
AV 1–4
V-AUX
AUDIO 1–4
PHONO
USB
Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.
1
2
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
Press RECEIVER z.
MULTI
NET
TUNER
Each time you press the key, Zone2 is enabled or disabled.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.57)
• Playing back iPod music (p.64)
PARTY
HDMI OUT
When Zone2 is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front
display.
MAIN/ZONE2
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.68)
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
Use the following keys to select an input source.
3
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.71)
AV 1–4: AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
V-AUX: VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks (on the front panel)
AUDIO 1–4: AUDIO 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
PHONO: PHONO jacks
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
• Listening to Internet radio (p.74)
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
(p.76)
ENTER
USB: USB jack (on the front panel)
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
NET: NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a desired
network source)
• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the web control
to control Zone2. For details on the web control function, refer to
“Supplement for Web Control” on the CD-ROM.
TUNING
PRESET
TUNER: FM/AM radio
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
• AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the
main zone.
• You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For
example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the
main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”.
Caution
• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.
MEMORY
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En 81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Other operations for Zone2
■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
SOURCE
RECEIVER
rooms (party mode)
The following functions are also available when Zone2 is enabled.
V-AUX
The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music
that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode,
stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this
function when you want to use main zone music as background
music for a house party.
Adjusting the volume
UDI
Press VOLUME or MUTE.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)
Press SCENE.
MAIN
ZONE
2
HDMI OUT
PARTY
SCENE
Press PARTY.
1
• To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene,
hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front
display.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or
off.
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the
front display.
Setting the sleep timer
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30
min, off).
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
• If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.110) in
the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default).
Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (2.0 dB steps)
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
Default
0.0 dB
MEMORY
10
ENT
Adjusting the Zone2 front speaker balance
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En 82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
Viewing the current status
V-AUX
UDI
Switching information on the front display
Input source group Item
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name)
USB
SERVER
AirPlay
Press INFO.
1
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
* During simple playback of iPod:
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
CENE
DOCK
TAG
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HD
Info
AudioꢀDecoder
PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station
(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name)
ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
NET RADIO
3
HD
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
Item name
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
ON
SCREEN
Viewing the status information on the TV
OPTION
ENTER
DOCK
TAG
HD
Press DISPLAY.
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀAV1
ꢀꢀꢀProꢀLogic
PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
1
ZONE
2
RETURN
MODE
BAND
DISPLAY
INFO
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
The following information is displayed on the TV.
Compressed Music Enhancer status
TUNING
PRESET
Information
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
Volume
Input source/
Party mode
status
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.
MEMORY
10
ENT
Input source group Item
AV 1–7
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
V-AUX
AUDIO 1–4
PHONO
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name)
Audio format/
Decoder
Sound
mode
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name)
CINEMA DSP status
* (U.S.A. model only)
HD Radio data is also available when the unit is tuned
into an HD Radio station (p.59).
To close the information display, press DISPLAY.
TUNER
2
* (U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.61).
PLAYBACK
➤
Viewing the current status
En 83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.
Option menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
Press OPTION.
1
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
DOCK
TAG
HD
Option
ToneꢀControl
PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
Item
Function
Page
ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
Tone Control
(Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency
range of sounds.
85
Front display
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume
is adjusted.
Adaptive DRC
(Adaptive DRC)
85
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
(CINEMA DSP 3D)
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
85
86
86
86
86
87
87
87
87
Dialogue Level
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds.
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds.
(Dialog Lvl)
Dialogue Adjust
(Dialog Adjust)
Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)
Extended Surround
(EXTD Surround)
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources
when surround back speakers are used.
TV screen
Input Trim
Corrects volume differences between input sources.
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
(In.Trim)
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
Volume Trim
2
(Volume Trim)
Subwoofer
Trim (SW.Trim)
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
3
4
Video Mode
(Video Mode)
Enables/disables the video signal processing
settings configured in the “Setup” menu.
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Audio Select
(Audio Select)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than
one audio connection is made for one input source.
(U.S.A. model only)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM
radio reception.
Audio Mode
(Audio Mode)
87
88
(Except for U.S.A. model)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio
reception.
FM Mode
(FM Mode)
PLAYBACK
➤
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
En 84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted
when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to
playback at a low volume at night.
Item
Function
Page
(U.S.A. model only)
Enables/disables the hold function when the unit is
tuned into an HD Radio station.
Hold/Unhold
(Hold/Unhold)
60
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Automatically searches for a traffic information
station.
Settings
Traffic Program
(TrafficProgram)
62
On (On)
Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.67),
USB storage device (p.70), or media server (p.73).
Off (Off) (default)
The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
—
—
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a
high volume.
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.67),
USB storage device (p.70), or media server (p.73).
Volume: low
Volume: high
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.
On
On
Off
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Off
Input level
Input level
Setting range
-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments
Default
Bypass (Bypass)
■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D)
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.54). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP
3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo).
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
Adjusting with the front panel controls
Settings
On (On) (default)
Off (Off)
Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.
Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
a Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
PLAYBACK
➤
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
En 85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Adjust)
■ Extended Surround (EXTD Surround)
Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers
are used.
❑ Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you
can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
Settings
Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain
Auto (Auto)
(default)
surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals
in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected,
the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel.
Setting range
0 to 3
Default
Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround
back speakers are connected.
bPLIIx Movie
(bPLIIxMo)
0
❑ Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is
coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this
setting.
Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two
surround back speakers are connected.
bPLIIx Music
(bPLIIxMu)
Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and
reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.
EX/ES (EX/ES)
Off (Off)
Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when
DTS-ES or Dolby Digital EX signal is input, the unit reproduces the
signal in 5.1-channel.)
• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when front presence
speakers are used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.54) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
• Some early Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround back
channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing back
those sources.
Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
Default
0
■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)
Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.
❑ Input Trim (In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
Ideal position
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
PLAYBACK
➤
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
En 86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
■ Audio Select (Audio Select)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for
one input source.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Settings
Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
1. HDMI input
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
■ Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.56).
Auto (Auto) (default)
3. Analog input (AUDIO)
Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals
HDMI (HDMI)
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
are input through the HDMI jack.
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.56).
Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are
Coax/Opt
(Coax/Opt)
produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or
Settings
OPTICAL jack.
Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when
Analog (Analog)
Off (Off)
On (On)
Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks.
Default
■ Audio Mode (Audio Mode)
TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
(U.S.A. model only)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM radio reception.
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz.
• This setting is applied separately to each band (FM/AM).
Settings
■ Video Mode (Video Mode)
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings
configured in “Processing” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu.
Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in stereo sounds when the
Auto (Auto) (default)
signal reception is good and in monaural sounds when it is not good.
Mono (Mono)
Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in monaural sounds.
Settings
Processing
Enables the video signal processing.
(Processing)
• HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the monaural reception mode.
Direct (Direct)
Disables the video signal processing.
(default)
PLAYBACK
➤
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
En 87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ FM Mode (FM Mode)
(Except for U.S.A. model)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Settings
Stereo (Stereo)
Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.
(default)
Mono (Mono)
Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.
PLAYBACK
➤
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
En 88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONFIGURATIONS
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
4
You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.
Press ON SCREEN.
1
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
5
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured
and press the cursor key (q).
3
Input menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
Item
Function
Page
90
Rename/Icon Select
Decoder Mode
Changes the input source name and icon.
Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS.
90
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via
AirPlay.
Volume Interlock
Video Out
90
90
91
The input source of the unit also changes.
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback.
DMC Control
• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
En 89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Rename/Icon Select
Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
6
■ Decoder Mode
Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.
Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, USB, MULTI CH
For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder
Mode” to “DTS”.
■ Setup procedure
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).
1
Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)
Settings
Auto (default)
DTS
Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.
Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)
■ Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Input sources
AirPlay
• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.
Settings
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
2
Off
Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
3
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range
(-80 dB to 0 dB and mute).
Limited (default)
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
4
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to
+16.5 dB and mute).
Full
■ Video Out
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Input sources
TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH
Settings
Off
Does not output video.
AV 1–7, V-AUX
Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
Default
USB: V-AUX
Others: Off
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
5
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
En 90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.49) using the TV screen.
Input source
SERVER
Press ON SCREEN.
1
2
Settings
Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
Disable
Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Allows DMCs to control playback.
Enable (default)
• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
3
• You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
En 91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Load
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
4
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.
Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene
assignments.
❑ Device Control
Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to
the unit via HDMI or on a Yamaha product connected to the REMOTE OUT jack.
(SCENE link playback)
Settings
Off
Disables the SCENE link playback function.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
5
6
Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this
if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is
connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports
HDMI Control.
HDMI Control
Enables SCENE link playback using remote control signals. Select this
if a Yamaha BD/DVD player is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack.
IR: Yamaha BD/DVD 1
Scene menu items
Enables SCENE link playback using remote control signals. Select this
IR: Yamaha BD/DVD 2 if a Yamaha BD/DVD player is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack
and “IR: Yamaha BD/DVD 1” does not work properly.
Item
Function
Page
Save
Registers the current settings in the selected scene.
92
Enables SCENE link playback using remote control signals. Select this
IR: Yamaha CD
if a Yamaha CD player is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack.
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can
also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items
to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings
currently assigned to the selected scene.
Load
92
Default
SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control
SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off
Rename/Icon Select
Reset
Changes the scene name and icon.
93
93
Restores the default settings for the selected scene.
• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI
Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.137).
■ Save
Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the
selected scene.
• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device
assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.50).
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
En 92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Detail
■ Rename/Icon Select
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings
currently assigned to the selected scene.
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Setup procedure
To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
1
For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with
low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV) and
include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO).
Check or uncheck
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
Choices
Input
Input (p.48), Audio Select (p.87)
HDMI Output
Mode
HDMI Output (p.48)
Sound Program (p.51), Pure Direct Mode (p.104), Enhancer (p.56)
Sound
(p.86), Subwoofer Trim (p.87), Extended Surround (p.86)
Surround
Video
Video Mode (p.105)
Volume
Master Volume (p.48)
Lipsync
Lipsync (p.103), Delay (p.104)
Setting Pattern (p.100), PEQ Select (p.102)
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
Speaker Setup
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
4
Default
Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected
Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
5
■ Reset
Restores the default settings (p.49) for the selected scene.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
En 93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring sound programs/surround
decoders (Sound Program menu)
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
4
You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the
TV screen.
Press ON SCREEN.
1
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
5
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be
configured and press the cursor key (q).
3
• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu)
En 94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound Program menu items
Item
Function
Settings
0 ms to 250 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and reverberant sound
generation.
Reverb Delay
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.
0% to 100%
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant
sound.
Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower
to weaken it.
Reverb Level
■ Settings for sound programs
Item
Function
Settings
The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”.
Selects a surround decoder to be used
in combination with the selected sound
program.
bPLIIx Movie (bPLII
Movie), Neo:6 Cinema
Decode Type
Sound program Item
Function
Settings
Selects whether to
automatically bypass the
DSP circuit when an
analog audio source is
played back.
-6 dB to +3 dB (default: 0 dB)
Higher to enhance the sound
field effect, and lower to
reduce it.
DSP Level
Adjusts the sound field effect level.
2ch Stereo
Direct
Auto (default), Off
1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and presence sound field
generation.
Level
Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to +5 (default: 0)
-5 to +5 (default: 0)
Initial Delay
Adjusts the front and rear
Higher to enhance the front
side, and lower to enhance
the rear side.
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround sound field
generation.
Front / Rear Balance
volume balance.
Surround Initial Delay
1 ms to 49 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
-5 to +5 (default: 0)
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround back sound field
generation.
Surround Back Initial
Delay
Adjusts the right and left
volume balance.
Higher to enhance the right
side, and lower to enhance
the left side.
Left / Right Balance
7ch Stereo
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
presence sound field.
Room Size
0 to 10 (default: 5)
0.1 to 2.0
Higher to enhance the
upside, and lower to
enhance the downside. (The
front presence speakers do
not produce sounds when
“Height Balance” is set to
“0”.)
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround sound field.
Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower
to reduce it.
Surround Room Size
Adjust the height volume
balance using the front
presence speakers.
Height Balance
Monaural Mix
Surround Back Room
Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround back sound field.
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound
field.
Liveness
Enables/disables
monaural sound output.
0 to 10
Off (default), On
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound
field.
Higher to enhance the
reflectivity, and lower to
reduce it.
Surround Liveness
Surround Back
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround back
sound field.
• Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.
1.0 s to 5.0 s
Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.
Higher to enrich the
reverberant sound and lower
to have clear sound.
Reverb Time
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu)
En 95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Settings for decoders
The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND
DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”.
Decode Type
Item
Function
Settings
Off (default), On
Select “On” to wrap front right/left
channel sounds around the field
and generate a spacious sound
field in combination with the
surround sound field.
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the front sound
field.
Panorama
0 to 7 (default: 3)
bPLIIx Music
(bPLII Music)
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the center
sound field.
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect, and lower to reduce it
(closer to center).
Center Width
Dimension
-3 to +3 (default: 0)
Adjusts the difference in
level between the front
and surround sound
fields.
Higher to strengthen the front
sound field and lower to strengthen
the surround sound field.
0.0 to 1.0 (default: 0.3)
Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of
the front sound field.
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).
Neo:6 Music
Center Image
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu)
En 96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
5
6
Press ON SCREEN.
1
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
4
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menu items
Menu
Item
Function
Page
40
Auto Setup
Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO).
Setting Pattern
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
Selects a speaker system.
100
100
100
100
101
101
101
101
101
102
102
102
102
102
103
103
103
104
104
104
104
104
104
105
106
106
107
Setting Data Copy
Power Amp Assign
Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size.
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size.
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected.
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.
Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”.
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position.
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Surround
Surround Back
Front Presence
Subwoofer
Extra Bass
Bass Cross Over
Speaker
Configuration
Manual Setup
Distance
Level
Parametric EQ
Test Tone
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Enables/disables the test tone output.
Delay Enable
Auto/Manual Select
Adjustment
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually.
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback.
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Lipsync
Dynamic Range
Max Volume
Sound
Initial Volume
Pure Direct Mode
Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on.
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode.
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).
Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input).
Selects a device to output audio.
Adaptive DSP Level
Video Mode
Video
HDMI
HDMI Control
Audio Output
Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu
Item
Function
Page
107
108
108
108
109
109
109
109
110
110
110
110
110
111
111
111
111
112
112
112
113
113
113
IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
Network Standby
MAC Address Filter
Network Name
Main Zone Set Zone Rename
Volume
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices.
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
Network
Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone.
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Initial Volume
Zone2 Set
Mono
Multi Zone
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.
Zone Scene Rename
Zone Rename
Monitor Out Assign
Changes the scene names (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used.
Enables/disables switching to the party mode.
Party Mode Set
Input Assignment
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Dimmer (Front Display)
Short Message
Wall Paper
Display Set
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated.
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Function
Trigger Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Trigger Output1
Trigger Output2
Target Zone
Memory Guard
Auto Power Down
ECO Mode
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function.
ECO
Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode).
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
Speaker (Manual Setup)
Configures the speaker settings manually.
The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2
subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power
amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system.
Settings
Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to
Basic (default)
7-channel plus front presence speakers) (p.15).
Select this option when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone
and Zone2 speakers (p.21).
7ch +1ZONE
Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including
bi-amp front speakers) (p.20).
5ch BI-AMP
■ Setting Pattern
Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including
bi-amp front speakers) plus surround back channel expansion using
an external amplifier (p.21).
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
5ch BI-AMP +SB
When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in
the selected pattern.
• Measurement results (Auto Setup)
• Power Amp Assign
• Configuration
■ Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
• Distance
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).
• Level
• Parametric EQ
❑ Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
Pattern1 (default), Pattern2
Settings
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Large
• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Auto Setup” and “Manual Setup” screens.
• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your
listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed,
you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
(configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
Small (default)
■ Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.
Choices
Pattern1 > 2
Pattern2 > 1
Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.
Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Center
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
Small x2 (default)
None
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
Select this option for large speakers.
Large
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
• This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”.
Small (default)
None
❑ Front Presence
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected.
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
Settings
❑ Surround
Use (default)
None
Select this option when front presence speakers are connected.
Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
❑ Subwoofer
Select this option for large speakers.
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.
Large
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.
Settings
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not
reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels.
Small (default)
None
Normal
(default)
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.
Use
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed).
The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio
and low-frequency components from other channels.
Reverse
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front
speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
❑ Surround Back
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
None
Settings
Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
Large x1
Large x2
Small x1
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Extra Bass
■ Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.
Settings
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer
Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or
Off (default)
front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components.
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel
On
low-frequency components.
Default
0.0 dB
• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”, or when “Front” is set to “Small”.
■ Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Settings
❑ Bass Cross Over
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker
whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be
produced from the subwoofer or front speakers.
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
Manual
Settings
YPAO:Flat
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (default), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as
the front speakers.
YPAO:Front
• If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and
crossover frequency to maximum.
YPAO:Natural
Through
Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
Does not use the equalizer.
■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
Setup” have already been saved (p.40). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer
Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
1
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
2
Setting range
0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
3
Default
3.00 m (10.0 ft)
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.40) to the “Manual” fields for
fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset band and the cursor keys (q/w) to
adjust the gain.
4
Configures the audio output settings.
Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
■ Lipsync
To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER
repeatedly to select an item.
5
6
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected
band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
❑ Delay Enable
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Choices
AV 1–7, AUDIO 1–4
Setting range
Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.08
Settings
Disable
Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Enable (default)
■ Test Tone
❑ Auto/Manual Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Setting range
Settings
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
Off (default)
On
Does not output test tones.
unit via HDMI.
Auto (default)
Manual
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in
“Adjustment”.
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV
connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Adjustment
■ Initial Volume
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual
Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when
“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
Off (default)
On
standby mode.
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max
Volume”.)
■ Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.55).
Setting range
Settings
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from
Default
the selected input source or an input source that can be operated with
Auto (default)
0 ms
the on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input,
the wall paper is displayed.
Video Off
Does not output video signals including the wall paper.
• “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment.
■ Adaptive DSP Level
■ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
Settings
Settings
Off
Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO
measurement results and the volume level.
Maximum (default)
Standard
Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
On (default)
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
Minimum/Auto
■ Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Default
+16.5 dB
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Aspect
Video
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Configures the video output settings.
Settings
Through (default)
16:9 Normal
Does not convert the aspect ratio.
Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side
of the screen.
• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or
2160p (4K) signals.
■ Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).
Settings
Direct (default)
Processing
Disables the video signal processing.
Enables the video signal processing.
Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to
reduce video output delay.
❑ Resolution
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
Through
Does not convert the resolution.
Auto (default)
Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K
• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.117) in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on
your TV normally.)
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ ARC
Enables/disables ARC (p.25) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Configures the HDMI settings.
Settings
Off
Disables ARC.
Enables ARC.
On (default)
• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected
to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to
“Off” and use the TV’s speakers.
❑ Standby Sync
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit
when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
■ HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.137).
Settings
Settings
Off
On
Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Off (default)
On
Disables HDMI Control.
Enables HDMI Control.
Sync”.
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
Auto (default)
■ Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.137) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
❑ TV Audio Input
• The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
❑ Amp
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected to
the unit.
Settings
AUDIO 1–4
Settings
Default
AUDIO 1
Off
Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.
Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.
On (default)
• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting
an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or
HDMI OUT 2 jack.
Network
Configures the network settings.
Settings
Off (default)
On
Disables the audio output from the TV.
Enables the audio output from the TV.
• The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.
■ Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection
keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby
mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).
■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
❑ DHCP
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
Off (default)
On
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
Settings
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.
Off
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).
On (default)
• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
■ Manual network settings
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
1
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.
IP Address
Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
DNS Server (P)
DNS Server (S)
Specifies a subnet mask.
Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a value.
3
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
4
5
To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
6
7
■ Procedure
■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
1
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
Settings
entry.
Off (default)
On
Disables the network standby function.
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
■ MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
❑ Filter
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
Off (default)
On
Disables the MAC address filter.
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
3
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access
to the unit.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
4
❑ MAC Address 1–10
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted
access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■ Procedure
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10”
and press ENTER.
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.
2
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a value.
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
4
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
6
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Zone2 Set
Configures the Zone2 settings.
Multi Zone
Configures the multi zone settings.
❑ Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable
volume adjustments for Zone2.
Settings
Fixed
Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
Variable (default)
■ Main Zone Set
Configures the main zone setting.
• This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” (p.100) is set to “7ch +1ZONE.
❑ Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
❑ Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Setting range
■ Procedure
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Default
+16.5 dB
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
1
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
❑ Initial Volume
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Settings
Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby
Off (default)
mode.
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
On
increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.)
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
3
• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
4
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Mono
❑ Zone Rename
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.
Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone
Set” (p.109).
Settings
Off (default)
On
Produces stereo sounds in Zone2.
Produces monaural sounds in Zone2.
■ Monitor Out Assign
Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO,
S VIDEO and VIDEO) jacks are used.
❑ Zone Scene Rename
Changes the scene names (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Settings
Main (default), Zone2
■ Procedure
Use the cursor keys to select a scene to be renamed and press ENTER.
1
• To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video
monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from
the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
with a component video cable.
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
3
■ Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.82).
Choice
Target: Zone2
Settings
Disable
Disables switching to the party mode.
Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party
mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.
Enable (default)
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
4
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
5
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
3
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
• You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.
■ Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
❑ Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)
■ Input Assignment
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input
source.
Default
0
• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.113) is set to “On”.
■ Procedure
Example: assigning the OPTICAL (e) jack to the input source “AV 2”
❑ Short Message
Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”,
and press ENTER.
1
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment).
Settings
On (default)
Off
Displays short messages on the TV screen.
Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
❑ Wall Paper
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Settings
Picture 1 (default),
Picture 2, Picture 3
Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Use the cursor keys to select “e” and press ENTER.
2
Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Gray
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Target Zone
■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2
Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone
or input switching.
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Settings
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
❑ Trigger Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
Main
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
Settings
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the
is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
Power (default)
Zone2
zone specified with “Target Zone”.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in
the zone specified with “Target Zone”.
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in
“Source.”
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2.
Source
All (default)
Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal
transmission with “Manual”.
Manual
■ Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
Source
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching
when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
Off (default)
On
Does not protect the settings.
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH
Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
Settings
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input
source specified in this option.
Low
• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
High (default)
Icon
Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger
Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of
the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Choices
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission.
Transmits the electronic signal.
High (default)
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ ECO Mode
ECO
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
Configures the power supply settings.
When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.
Settings
Off (default)
On
Disables the eco mode.
Enables the eco mode.
• The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
■ Auto Power Down
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for
the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode.
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
Settings
Off
Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit
will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours
Default
U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours
Other models: Off
Settings
• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerDown” appears and then countdown starts in the
front display.
English (default)
English
Japanese
French
日本語
Français
Deutsch
Español
German
Spanish
Russian
Chinese
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Types of information
Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)
■ Audio Signal
Displays information about the current audio signal.
You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.
Format
Audio format of the input signal
Press ON SCREEN.
1
2
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total
(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).
Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.
Channel
Input
Sampling
Bitrate
The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal
The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
The speaker terminals from which signals are output
Dialogue
Output
• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
specifications and settings of the playback device.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.
3
■ Video Signal
Displays information about the current video signal.
HDMI Signal
Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution
Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT
jacks (analog)
Analog Resolution
■ HDMI Monitor
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.
Interface
TV interface
Video Resolution
Resolutions supported by the TV
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu)
En 114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Network
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
Displays the network information on the unit.
IP Address
IP address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
DNS Server (P)
DNS Server (S)
MAC Address
Network Name
Status
Subnet mask
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
The IP address of the default gateway
The IP address of the primary DNS server
The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC address
Set the unit to standby mode.
1
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE
z.
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHT
Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.108)
The connection status of the NETWORK jack
■ System
Displays the system information on the unit.
PROGRAM
Remote ID
TV Format
The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.116)
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
3
4
5
(Asia and General models only)
Tuner Freq. Step
System ID
System ID number
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on
again.
Firmware Version
The new settings take effect.
• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of
the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You
can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating
the unit’s firmware” (p.124).
■ Zone
Displays information about Zone2.
Input
The input source selected for Zone2
The volume for Zone2
Volume
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
En 115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)
Item
Function
Page
116
DOCK
TAG
HD
SPEAKER IMP.
REMOTE SENSOR
Changes the speaker impedance setting.
Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit.
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- REMOTEꢀSENSOR
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
116
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀON
REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID.
116
Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor
is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.
(Asia and General models only)
TUNER FRQ STEP
117
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
Settings
TV FORMAT
Switches the video signal type.
117
117
ON (default)
OFF
Turns on the remote control sensor.
Turns off the remote control sensor.
MONITOR CHECK
Removes the limitation on HDMI video output.
from the backup.
RECOV./BACKUP
118
INITIALIZE
FIRM UPDATE
VERSION
Restores the default settings.
118
118
118
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP)
Updates the firmware.
DOCK
TAG
HD
Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- REMOTEꢀCONꢀAMP
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀID1
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.)
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
DOCK
TAG
HD
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- ꢀSPEAKERꢀIMP.
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
Settings
ID1 (default), ID2
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ8ꢀMIN
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be
automatically canceled.
Settings
Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You
6 Ω MIN
Press CODE SET on the remote control.
1
can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
Press RECEIVER.
Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the
unit.
2
8 Ω MIN (default)
Use the numeric keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2).
3
Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.
If it blinks six times, registration failed. Repeat from Step 1.
• The registered remote control codes (p.119) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
En 116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting
(TUNER FRQ STEP)
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)
(Asia and General models only)
DOCK
TAG
HD
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- MONITORꢀCHECK
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
DOCK
TAG
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
HD
TUNERꢀFRQꢀSTEP
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀFM50/AM9
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀYES
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
IN OUT
ZONE PARTY
ZONE
2
SLEEP
3
4
1
OUT
2
3
HD
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”
(p.105) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a
different resolution than the detected resolution.
Settings
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz
steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.
FM100/AM10
Settings
Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
resolution supported by the TV only.)
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.
YES (default)
FM50/AM9 (default)
Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
SKIP
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
DOCK
TAG
HD
• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV
after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- ꢀꢀTVꢀFORMAT
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀNTSC
Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
En 117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)
Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE)
DOCK
TAG
HD
DOCK
TAG
HD
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- RECOV./BACKUP
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- ꢀFIRMꢀUPDATE
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
ZONE
2
3
4
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
3
HD
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀBACKUP
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀUSB
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is
connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details,
refer to the information supplied with updates.
■ Backup/recovery procedure
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO
to start the process.
1
■ Firmware update procedure
Choices
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
BACKUP
Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.
Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when
backup has been created).
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to
start firmware update.
1
RECOVERY
Choices
Note
USB
Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
Update the firmware via the network.
• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored
correctly.
NETWORK
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).
• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware” (p.124).
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)
DOCK
TAG
HD
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- ꢀꢀINITIALIZE
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀCANCEL
DOCK
TAG
HD
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- ꢀꢀꢀVERSION
Restores the default settings for the unit.
STEREO TUNED PZRONEE AMP
ZONE PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Choices
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀx.xx
VIDEO
ALL
Restores the default settings for video configurations.
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Does not perform an initialization.
CANCEL
• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.115) in the “Information” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
En 118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I
V
E
R
RECE
SOURCE
Controlling external devices with the remote control
V-AUX
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices
(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control
code of the external device.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.
UDI
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
Press TV z.
3
4
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.
• Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other
ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly.
CENE
Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote
control code.
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
• If the unit’s remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the
registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register
the codes again.
Once the remote control code is successfully registered, SOURCE
blinks twice.
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.
• Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all
the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI
ON
OPTION
SCREEN
Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This
function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)
■ TV operations
ENTER
Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you
can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input
source selected on the unit.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
Registering the remote control code for a TV
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INPUT
MUTE
Switches the video inputs of the TV.
Mutes the audio output of the TV.
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have
registered its remote control code.
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
TV operation keys
TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV.
Numeric keys
TV CH
Switch the channels of the TV.
Turns on/off the TV.
• You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection
keys (p.120). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to
operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).
TV z
TV operation keys
TV z
• (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)
You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.121).
CODE SET
Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find your TV’s remote control code.
1
• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list.
If that does not work, try the other codes.
Press CODE SET.
2
SOURCE blinks twice.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Playback device operations
Registering the remote control codes for
playback devices
SOURCE z
SOURCE
RECEIVER
Once you have registered the remote control code for your
playback device, you can control it using the following keys after
selecting the input source or scene.
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if
you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use
the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are
controlled by the remote control, because their remote control
codes are assigned to the input selection keys.
Input selection keys
• By pressing SOURCE or RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or
external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and
numeric keys. You can operate the unit after pressing RECEIVER (lights up in
orange), and an external device after pressing SOURCE (lights up in green). For
example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on
TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio after pressing RECEIVER
and the external device after pressing SOURCE.
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
CENE
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
• (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)
You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.121).
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
SOURCE z
Turns on/off the playback device.
Select an item.
Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find the remote control code for your playback
device.
1
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
External device
operation keys
Menu operation
keys
ON
Confirms a selected item.
Returns to the previous screen.
Switches information on the display.
Displays the top menu.
OPTION
SCREEN
RETURN
ENTER
Menu operation keys
• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If
that does not work, try the other codes.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
DISPLAY
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU Displays the pop-up menu.
External device
operation keys
TUNING
PRESET
Press CODE SET.
s
d
Stops playback.
2
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
1
MUSIC
SLEEP
2
SOURCE blinks twice.
Stops playback temporarily.
3
7
4
8
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.
External device
operation keys
Starts playback of the selected
song/video.
a
5
6
Numeric keys
MEMORY
10
9
0
ENT
h
j
f
g
Searches forward/backward (by
holding down).
TV
TV operation keys
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
Press the input selection key.
3
CODE SET
Skips forward/backward.
For example, press AV 1 to set the remote control code for
the playback device connected to the AV 1 jack.
Numeric keys
Enter numerical values.
Control the TV (p.119).
Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote
control code.
TV operation keys
4
Once the remote control code is registered successfully, SOURCE
blinks twice.
• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback
device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.
If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.
• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to
“Configuring scene assignments” (p.50).
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming from other remote controls
(learning)
RECEIVER
Perform the following steps within 10 seconds.
SOURCE z
SOURCE
5
V-AUX
a On the unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to
assign a function.
(China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)
UDI
For playback device: SOURCE z, menu operations keys,
external device operation keys
The remote control of the unit can receive remote control signals
from other infrared remote controls and learn the remote control
operation. If you cannot find a remote control code for your
playback device or if any key on the remote control does not work
after you register the remote control code, use the learning function
to assign a function to each key.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
For TV: TV operation keys
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
b On the external device, press the key from which the operation is
learned.
CENE
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
Once the operation is learned successfully, SOURCE blinks
twice.
Press CODE SET.
MUTE
VOLUME
1
PROGRAM
If it blinks six times, learning has failed. Repeat Step 5.
SOURCE blinks twice.
External device
operation keys
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
Repeat step 5 until all desired operations are
learned.
ON
SCREEN
6
7
OPTION
Menu operation keys
Press CODE SET.
MODE
DISPLAY
Press one of the following keys depending on the
type of your device.
2
SOURCE blinks once.
External device
operation keys
For playback device: press the input selection key
(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is
connected).
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Note
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
• If you press RECEIVER in step 2, you can assign functions of an external
receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys or
numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control the unit impossible. If
you need to restore the remote control code for the unit, perform the following
steps.
For TV: press TV z.
MEMORY
10
ENT
Use the numeric keys to enter “9990”.
3
4
TV operation keys
TV z
a Press CODE SET.
b Press RECEIVER.
Aim the infrared transmitters of the remote controls
at each other.
c Use the numeric keys to enter “9992”.
CODE SET
Remote control of external device
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4”) apart
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE
■ Clearing the assignments for each input
Clearing functions learned from other
remote controls
RECEIVER
source
(China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)
Press CODE SET.
1
Input selection keys
SOURCE blinks twice.
■ Clearing the assignment for each key
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Press CODE SET.
1
CENE
SOURCE blinks twice.
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
Press one of the following keys to select the device
2
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
for which key assignments will be cleared.
For playback device: press the input selection key.
For TV: press TV z.
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Press one of the following keys to select the device
OPTION
2
for which key assignments will be cleared.
For playback device: press the input selection key.
For TV: press TV z.
Use the numeric keys to enter “9992”.
3
ENTER
Once the key assignment is cleared successfully, SOURCE blinks
twice.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
If it blinks six times, clearing failed. Repeat from Step 1.
TUNING
PRESET
Use the numeric keys to enter “9991”.
3
4
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
Press the key that you want to reset.
Once the key assignment is cleared successfully, SOURCE
blinks twice.
Numeric keys
If it blinks six times, clearing failed. Repeat from Step 2.
INPUT
MUTE
TV z
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
Repeat step 4 until all desired key assignments are
cleared.
5
Press CODE SET.
6
SOURCE blinks once.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE
Resetting remote control codes
RECEIVER
You can reset a remote control code registered to each input
selection key.
Input selection keys
Press CODE SET.
1
SOURCE blinks twice.
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
CENE
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
Press the input selection key.
2
3
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
Use the numeric keys to enter “5098”.
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Once the remote control code is reset successfully, SOURCE blinks
twice.
ENTER
If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
To reset the remote control to factory default settings
TUNING
PRESET
a Press CODE SET.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
b Press RECEIVER.
c Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”.
Numeric keys
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
Updating the unit’s firmware
New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.
V-AUX
UDI
• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation
mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a
message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.115). You can update the
unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
MAIN
ZONE
2
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Note
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
CENE
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
Information
icon
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.118).
ON
OPTION
SCREEN
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed
after ON SCREEN is pressed.
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
Message
System Icon
MEMORY
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
CODE SET
Read the on-screen description.
1
2
To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to
select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off.
If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”
appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z
on the front panel.
3
The firmware update is complete.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Updating the unit’s firmware
En 124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Frequently asked questions
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to
optimize the speaker settings again (p.40). If you want to adjust the speaker settings
manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.100).
I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you
when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.111) in the
“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.104). You can also set the maximum volume for
Zone2 (p.109).
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.112).
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.116).
on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume for Zone2 (p.109).
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.
APPENDIX
➤
Frequently asked questions
En 125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the following:
a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets
securely.
b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power and system
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby
indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn on.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
The power does not turn off.
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
in the power supply voltage.
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.18).
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
The sleep timer worked.
Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Down” in the “Setup” menu
for the specified time.
to “Off” (p.113).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.116).
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short
circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.18).
The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to
the unit is too high.
“Off” (p.113).
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
The unit is not reacting.
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
in the power supply voltage.
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
APPENDIX
➤
Troubleshooting
En 126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Another input source is selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.114).
No sound.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.
The maximum volume is set.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.104).
The volume cannot be increased.
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.114).
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.103).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.40) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change
the speaker settings (p.100).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.40) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the
speaker volume (p.102).
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
No sound is coming from the surround back
speaker.
Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used
(p.86).
The extended surround is disabled.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.
To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the
front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.102).
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.40) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use”
(p.101).
Subwoofer output is disabled.
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The volume of the subwoofer is too low.
Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function.
Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.106).
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
No sound from the playback device (connected to The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the unit with HDMI).
the SPEAKERS terminals.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.
APPENDIX
➤
Troubleshooting
En 127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.106).
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.106). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.114). If necessary,
change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.
Move the unit further away from the device.
Noise/hum is heard.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to
“Off” (p.113).
The volume of the unit is too high.
The sound is distorted.
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on.
Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
Video
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Another input source is selected on the unit.
Another input source is selected on the TV.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.117).
No video.
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video
Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.114). For information about video signals
supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.138).
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.
You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with
an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.25 to 28).
The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.
Another input source is selected on the TV.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
APPENDIX
➤
Troubleshooting
En 128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM radio
Problem
Cause
Remedy
There is multi-path interference.
Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
(U.S.A. model only)
Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.87).
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
(Except for U.S.A. model)
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.88).
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
Select the station manually (p.57).
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Select the station manually (p.57).
The AM radio signal is weak.
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations and HD Radio station (U.S.A.
model only) only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.58).
Auto Preset has been used.
The unit does not receive HD Radio signals.
(U.S.A. model only)
The unit is in the monaural reception mode.
Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Auto” (p.87).
APPENDIX
➤
Troubleshooting
En 129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USB and network
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32.
Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
The unit does not detect the USB device.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.
The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
Use a USB device without an encryption function.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.
The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.107). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.107).
The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.
The network feature does not function.
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.71).
The media sharing setting is not correct.
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC.
The unit does not detect the PC.
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.71).
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back.
The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.
The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.
The Internet radio cannot be played.
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
APPENDIX
➤
Troubleshooting
En 130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The unit is out of the operating range.
The batteries are weak.
Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).
Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in
orange).
The remote control is set to control external devices.
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.116).
Press SOURCE to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights
up in green).
The remote control is set to control the unit.
External devices cannot be controlled using the
remote control.
Set the remote control code again (p.119). Even if the remote control code is
registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.
The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.
The batteries of the remote control of the unit and/or the external
device are weak.
Replace with new batteries.
The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate.
Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.121).
Learning is impossible in this case.
The remote control does not learn new functions.
(China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)
The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not
compatible with the remote control.
Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for new functions
(p.122).
Memory capacity is full.
APPENDIX
➤
Troubleshooting
En 131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error indications on the front display
Message
Cause
Remedy
Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.71).
Access denied
Access to the PC is denied.
The unit cannot access the USB device.
The unit cannot access the iPod.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.
Access error
The connected iPod is not supported by the unit.
Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.64).
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.35).
Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
Check SP Wires
Internal Error
No content
The speaker cables short circuit.
An internal error has occurred.
There are no playable files in the selected folder.
The unit cannot detect the USB device.
The unit cannot detect the iPod.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.
No device
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.
Please wait
The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
RemID Mismatch
Remote Off
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.116).
The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the
remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.
Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.116).
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for
some reasons.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.
Unable to play
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.71). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.
USB Overloaded
An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
APPENDIX
➤
Error indications on the front display
En 132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
DTS Express
Audio information
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
■ Audio decoding format
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
Dolby Digital
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital EX
DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby
Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology
offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three
modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources (for 2-channel sources only).
Dolby TrueHD
FLAC
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
DTS-ES
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.
APPENDIX
➤
Glossary
En 133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
HDMI and video information
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.
WAV
Deep Color
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
■ Others
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification
connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a
consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the C
signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. This technology achieves more accurate color
reproduction than the composite video signal system.
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.
APPENDIX
➤
Glossary
En 134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
APPENDIX
➤
Glossary
En 135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are
output to a TV as shown below.
■ Video conversion table
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
S VIDEO VIDEO
out out
HDMI out
COMPONENT VIDEO out
480i/ 480p/
Video device
The unit
TV
480i/ 480p/
480i/
480i/
576i
Resolution
720p 1080i 1080p
4K
720p 1080i 1080p
576i
576p
m
m
576i
576p
576i
480i/576i
480p/576p
720p
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
HDMI in
HDMI out
1080i
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI in
1080p/
50, 60 Hz
m
m
m
m
m
1080p/24 Hz
4K
m
m
m
m
m
m
480i/576i
480p/576p
720p
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
COMPONENT
VIDEO out
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
m
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
m
m
m
1080i
1080p
S VIDEO in
S VIDEO out
S
VIDEO
S
VIDEO
S
VIDEO
S
VIDEO
S VIDEO in 480i/576i
VIDEO in 480i/576i
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
VIDEO in
VIDEO out
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
m
m: Available
APPENDIX
➤
Glossary
En 136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(Example)
Information on HDMI
HDMI Control
HDMI Control
HDMI Control
Playback starts
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
Press SCENE (BD/DVD)
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.25) and “Connecting video
devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.31).
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization
• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
1
2
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as
HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.106) in the “Setup”
menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “ARC”, and
“Standby Sync”).
(Example)
HDMI Control
HDMI Control
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.
3
Playback device
also turns off
The unit turns off
(standby)
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
4
5
6
Turn off the TV
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
Check the followings.
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.49)
If not, select the input source manually.
• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering
remote control codes (p.120)
APPENDIX
➤
Information on HDMI
En 137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDMI signal compatibility
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
7
Audio signals
Audio signal type
Audio signal format
Compatible media (example)
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
2ch Linear PCM
2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
Multichannel Linear PCM
8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
HD DVD
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
DSD
2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit
Dolby Digital, DTS
SACD
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
Bitstream
DVD-Video
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS
Express
Bitstream
(High definition audio)
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• VGA
• 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 480i/60 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
• 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
• 3840 x 2160p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz (4K signals)
• 4096 x 2160p/24 Hz (4K signals)
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.
APPENDIX
➤
Information on HDMI
En 138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference diagram (rear panel)
HDMI
AV 4
DC OUT
NETWORK
RS-232C
( 3
)
HDMI OUT
NET
5V
0.5A
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
AV 6
AV 7
1
2
ARC
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR AV 3 PB
PHONO
GND
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
TRIGGER
OUT
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
PB
Y
PR
C
AV 1
A
1
REMOTE
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
Y
PB
PR
IN
OUT
AV 2
B
2
D
AV 4
MULTI CH INPUT
12V
0.1A
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
CENTER
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
(2 TV)
L
1
2
R
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK
AC IN
SURROUND
CENTER
FRONT
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
BI–AMP
EXTRA SP
ANTENNA(4 RADIO)
HD Radio
AM
FM
75Ω
SINGLE
(U.S.A. model)
• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.
APPENDIX
➤
Reference diagram (rear panel)
En 139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trademarks
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign
Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corp.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;
7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the
Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a
trademark of DTS, Inc.
“HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been
designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the
developer to meet Apple performance standards.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory
standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network
Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
™
Windows
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
This receiver supports network connections.
APPENDIX
➤
Trademarks
En 140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
• Video
• Audio Format
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
- Composite x 1
- S-video x 1
- Dolby TrueHD
- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital
Audio x 10 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, V-AUX)
MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch)
- Component x 1
AV OUT
- DTS-HD Master Audio
- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
- DTS Express
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER)
- Composite x 1
- S-video x 1
• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Optical x 4 (AV 3–4, AUDIO 1, V-AUX)
- DTS
- DSD 6-ch
• HDMI Output
Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 2)
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2)
• Video
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
• Link Function: CEC supported
Other jacks
• REMOTE IN x 1
• REMOTE OUT x 1
• TRIGGER OUT x 2
• RS-232C x 1
Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX)
S-video x 4 (AV 1–4)
Component x 4 (AV 1–4)
TUNER
• Analog Tuner
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX)
[U.K. and Europe models]
FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[Other models]
• Other
• DC OUT x 1
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
HDMI
• HD Radio tuner [U.S.A. model] x 1 (TUNER)
• HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync,
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K
USB
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
- VGA
- Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP L/R
*1 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, F.PRESENCE,
BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory
*1
)
• Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
Network
- 480p/60 Hz
- Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R)
• PC Client Function
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
• AirPlay supported
• Internet Radio
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
- 3840 x 2160p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
- 4096 x 2160p/24 Hz
- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono)
- Audio x 1 (AV OUT)
- ZONE OUT x 1 (ZONE 2)
• Digital Audio
Optical x 1 (AV OUT)
APPENDIX
➤
Specifications
En 141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)
(JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
Ω)
PHONO to AV OUT (Input Shorted 5 mV)
[China, Korea, Asia and General models]
[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models]... 86 dB or more
[Other models]................................................... 81 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, Input Shorted 250 mV)
......................................................................... 100 dB or more
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
Front L/R.....................................................................165 W/ch
Center.........................................................................165 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................165 W/ch
Surround Back L/R .....................................................165 W/ch
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
- DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
- DTS Digital Surround
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Front L/R (Speaker Out)..................................... 150 µV or less
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω) ...................................135/165/210/280 W
• Channel Separation
• Post Decoding Format
• Damping Factor
PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ...60 dB/55 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc. (Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
.................................................................60 dB/45 dB or more
- Dolby Pro Logic
Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8 Ω............................................. 150 or more
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic II Game
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω) ................................ 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)....................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Volume Control
Main Zone ................ MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Zone2....................... MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
• Maximum Input Signal
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .............................. 60 mV or more
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD)........................ 2.4 V or more
• Tone Control Characteristics
Audio Section
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
Main Zone
Bass Boost/Cut ........................ 6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover .............................................................350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut...................... 6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover ..........................................................3.5 kHz
Zone2
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)
• Output Level / Output Impedance
Front L/R .............................................................110 W+110 W
Center............................................................................. 110 W
Surround L/R.......................................................110 W+110 W
Surround Back L/R .............................................110 W+110 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
AV OUT.............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
HEADPHONE OUT............................................. 150 mV/100 Ω
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER (50 Hz) ........................................ 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz) ............................ 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE OUT ............................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
Bass Boost/Cut ............................ 10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)
Bass Turnover .............................................................350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut........................... 10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)
Treble Turnover ..........................................................3.5 kHz
Front L/R .............................................................120 W+120 W
Center............................................................................. 120 W
Surround L/R.......................................................120 W+120 W
Surround Back L/R .............................................120 W+120 W
• Frequency Response
AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)................................+0/-3 dB
• Filter Characteristics
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .........................................0 0.5 dB
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)
..................................................................................12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct.
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
• Total Harmonic Distortion
Front L/R .................................................................... 135 W/ch
Center ....................................................................... 135 W/ch
Surround L/R.............................................................. 135 W/ch
Surround Back L/R .................................................... 135 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)
PHONO to AV OUT..............................................0.02% or less
MULTI CH INPUT to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, 70 W, 8 Ω)
............................................................................0.04% or less
Video Section
• Video Signal Type
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ................NTSC
[Other models]....................................................................PAL
Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models] ......................... 170 W/ch
• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion)..................... NTSC/PAL
APPENDIX
➤
Specifications
En 142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Video Signal Level
General
• Power Supply
Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video
[U.S.A. and Canada models]..........................AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General model] ............AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model]..................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model].............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model]....................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
C (NTSC) [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models]
..................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω
C (PAL) [Other models] ................................... 0.3 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Pb/Pr................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Power Consumption
• Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)
[U.S.A. model].................................................... 490 W/620 VA
[Canada model] ................................................. 400 W/510 VA
[Korea model] .................................................................390 W
[Other models] ................................................................490 W
....................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off).....60 dB or more
• Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off)
Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)
• Standby Power Consumption
............................................................5 Hz to 100 MHz, 3 dB
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off ...........0.3 W (Typical)
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On ...........4.5 W (Typical)
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through On (AV 1, No Signals)
..........................................................................4.5 W (Typical)
Network Standby On.........................................2.2 W (Typical)
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models]
• Maximum Power Consumption
.......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
[Asia and General models] ...........................................1190 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
............................435 x 182 x 432 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/8” x 17”)
Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Weight ...........................................................15.1 kg (33.3 lbs)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model]..................... 72 dB/70 dB
HD [U.S.A. model]...........................................................80 dB
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model]........................ 0.3%/0.5%
HD [U.S.A. model].......................................................... 0.03%
• Antenna Input ................................................75 Ω unbalanced
AM section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models]...... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
APPENDIX
➤
Specifications
En 143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
7ch +1ZONE (speaker configuration) ...... 21
7ch Stereo (sound program) .................... 53
Auto/Manual Select
Symbols
(Lipsync, Setup menu) ....................... 103
Automatic station preset (FM radio) ......... 63
Automatic station preset (HD Radio) ....... 61
AV OUT jacks ........................................... 36
bPLII Game (surround decoder) ............55
bPLII Movie (surround decoder) ............55
bPLII Music (surround decoder) ............55
bPLIIx Game (surround decoder) ..........55
bPLIIx Movie (Extended Surround) ........86
bPLIIx Music (Extended Surround) ........86
bPLIIx Music (surround decoder) ..........55
bPLIIxMo (Extended Surround) ..............86
bPLIIxMu (Extended Surround) ..............86
bPro Logic (surround decoder) ..............55
Lock icon (o) .........................................112
A
Access control (network device) ............ 108
Action Game (sound program) ................ 52
Adaptive DRC (Option menu) .................. 85
B
Backup/recovery of the settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ............... 118
Banana plug ............................................. 18
Bass Cross Over
(Sound, Setup menu) ......................... 104
Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) ........ 104
ADVANCED SETUP menu ...................... 115
ADVANCED SETUP menu items ............ 116
Adventure (sound program) ..................... 52
AirPlay ...................................................... 76
AM antenna .............................................. 34
Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) .......... 106
Apple Composite AV Cable ..................... 64
ARC (Audio Return Channel) ................... 25
ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) ......... 106
Aspect (Video Mode, Setup menu) ........ 105
Audio Decoder
(front display information) .................... 83
Audio device connection ......................... 33
Audio file format (PC/NAS) ....................... 71
Audio file format (USB storage device) .... 68
Audio Mode (Option menu) ...................... 87
Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) ........ 106
Audio program (HD Radio) ...................... 59
Audio Return Channel (ARC) ................... 25
Audio Select (Option menu) ..................... 87
Audio Signal (Information menu) ............ 114
Auto Power Down
(Configuration, Setup menu) .............. 102
Battery ........................................................ 5
Bitrate
(Audio Signal, Information menu) ....... 114
Bitstream ................................................ 138
Numerics
2.1-channel system
(speaker configuration) .........................16
2ch Stereo (sound program) .....................53
4K signal (video signal resolution) ..........138
5.1-channel system
(speaker configuration) .........................16
5ch BI-AMP
(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ......100
5ch BI-AMP +SB
5ch BI-AMP +SB
(speaker configuration) .........................21
7.1+2-channel system
7.1-channel system
7ch +1ZONE
C
Cartridge .................................................. 33
Cellar Club (sound program) ................... 53
Center (Configuration, Setup menu) ...... 101
Center Image (Sound Program menu) ..... 96
Center Width (Sound Program menu) ...... 96
Chamber (sound program) ...................... 53
Channel
(Audio Signal, Information menu) ....... 114
CINEMA DSP ............................................ 52
CINEMA DSP 3D ...................................... 54
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Option menu) .... 85
CLASSICAL
(sound program subcategory) ............. 53
Clearing (remote control) ....................... 122
Clock Time (Radio Data System) ............. 61
COAXIAL jack .......................................... 24
Component video cable ........................... 24
(ECO, Setup menu) ............................ 113
APPENDIX
➤
Index
En 144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COMPONENT VIDEO jack ........................24
Compressed Music Enhancer ..................56
Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) ....100
Crossover frequency setting
DNS Server
Extra Bass
(Network, Information menu) .............. 115
Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) ..... 86
Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) ....... 55
Dolby Pro Logic II (surround decoder) .... 55
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
(surround decoder) .............................. 55
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie
(Extended Surround) ............................ 86
(Extended Surround) ............................ 86
Drama (sound program) .......................... 52
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) ................... 133
DSP Level (Sound Program menu) .......... 95
DSP Program
(Configuration, Setup menu) .............. 102
F
Filter
(subwoofer) ...........................................40
(MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) .... 108
FIRM UPDATE
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ............... 118
Firmware Update .................................... 124
Firmware update
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ............... 118
Firmware Version
(System, Information menu) ............... 115
Firmware version check
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ............... 118
FM antenna .............................................. 34
FM Mode (Option menu) .......................... 88
FM/AM antenna connection ..................... 34
Format
(Audio Signal, Information menu) ....... 114
Frequency step setting
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................. 57
Front (Configuration, Setup menu) ......... 100
Front display
(part names and functions) .................. 10
Front display information .......................... 83
Front panel (part names and functions) ..... 8
Front panel door (front panel) .................... 8
Front Presence
D
DC OUT jack .............................................11
Decode Type (Sound Program menu) ......95
Default Gateway ......................................107
Default Gateway
(Network, Information menu) ...............115
Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) .....103
Detail (Scene menu) .................................93
Device Control (Scene menu) ...................92
DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) ............107
Dialogue
(Audio Signal, Information menu) .......114
Dialogue Adjust (Option menu) ................86
Dialogue Level (Option menu) ..................86
Dialogue Lift (Option menu) ......................86
Dialogue normalization level ...................114
Digital coaxial cable ..................................24
Digital Media Controller (DMC) .................91
Digital optical cable ..................................24
Dimension (Sound Program menu) ...........96
Dimmer (Front Display)
Direct (Sound Program menu) ..................95
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) ....................133
DISPLAY key .............................................83
Display Set (Function, Setup menu) .......111
Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) ............102
DMC (Digital Media Controller) .................91
DMC Control (Input menu) ........................91
DNS Server .............................................107
(front display information) .................... 83
DTS Neo:6 (surround decoder) ................ 55
DTS-ES (Extended Surround) .................. 86
Dynamic Range
(Sound, Setup menu) ......................... 104
E
ECO (Setup menu) ................................. 113
ECO Mode (ECO, Setup menu) ............. 113
Enhancer (Option menu) .......................... 87
ENHANCER (sound mode) ...................... 56
ENTERTAINMENT
(sound program subcategory) ............. 52
EX/ES (Extended Surround) ..................... 86
Extended Surround (Option menu) .......... 86
External device control
(remote control) .................................. 119
External device operation keys
(Configuration, Setup menu) .............. 101
Front/Rear Balance
(Sound Program menu) ........................ 95
Function (Setup menu) ........................... 111
G
(remote control) .................................... 12
External power amplifier connection ........ 23
GND terminal (turntable connection) ....... 33
Ground lead (turntable connection) ......... 33
APPENDIX
➤
Index
En 145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input menu ............................................... 89
Input menu items ..................................... 89
Input selection keys (remote control) ....... 12
Input Trim (Option menu) ......................... 86
Internet radio ............................................ 74
IP Address ............................................. 107
IP Address
(Network, Information menu) .............. 115
IP Address (Network, Setup menu) ........ 107
iPhone ...................................................... 64
iPod .......................................................... 64
iPod connection ....................................... 64
iTunes ....................................................... 76
MAC Address Filter
(Network, Setup menu) ...................... 108
Main Zone Set
H
Hall in Munich (sound program) ...............53
Hall in Vienna (sound program) ................53
HD Radio audio program selection ..........59
HD Radio information ................................59
HDMI (Setup menu) ................................106
HDMI cable ...............................................24
HDMI Control ..........................................137
HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) ........106
HDMI Monitor (Information menu) ...........114
HDMI OUT1
(Multi Zone, Setup menu) ................... 109
Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) ... 100
Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) ....... 58
Mass storage class device ...................... 68
Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) ........ 104
Max Volume
(Zone2 Set, Setup menu) ................... 109
Measurement result (YPAO) ..................... 44
Media sharing setup ................................ 71
Memory Guard
(Function, Setup menu) ...................... 112
Menu language selection ......................... 39
Menu operation keys (front panel) ............. 9
Menu operation keys (remote control) ..... 12
Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) ..... 95
Monaural reception mode (FM radio) ...... 57
MONITOR CHECK
(Audio Output, Setup menu) ...............107
HDMI OUT2
(Audio Output, Setup menu) ...............107
HDMI output selection ..............................48
Height Balance (Sound Program menu) ...95
High definition audio ...............................138
High speed HDMI cable ...........................24
Hold (HD Radio information) .....................60
Hold/Unhold (Option menu) ......................60
L
Language (Setup menu) ........................ 113
Learning (remote control) ...................... 121
Left/Right Balance
(Sound Program menu) ........................ 95
Level (Sound Program menu) .................. 95
Level (Speaker, Setup menu) ................. 102
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) ................. 134
Lipsync ................................................... 134
Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) ................ 103
LIVE/CLUB
(sound program subcategory) ............. 53
Liveness (Sound Program menu) ............. 95
Low Frequency Effects (LFE) ................. 134
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ............... 117
Monitor check
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ............... 117
Monitor Out Assign
I
INFO key ...................................................83
Information display (front display) ............10
Information menu ....................................114
Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) .........95
Initial setting restoration
(Multi Zone, Setup menu) ................... 110
Mono (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) ............. 110
Mono Movie (sound program) .................. 52
MOVIE (sound program category) ........... 52
MOVIE THEATER
(sound program subcategory) ............. 52
MULTI CH INPUT jacks ............................ 36
Multi measure (YPAO) .............................. 43
Multi Zone (Setup menu) ........................ 109
Multi-zone ................................................. 78
MUSIC (sound program category) ........... 53
Music Video (sound program) ................. 52
Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) ........104
Initial Volume
(Zone2 Set, Setup menu) ....................109
INITIALIZE
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................118
Input Assignment
(Function, Setup menu) .......................111
Input jack assignment .............................111
M
MAC Address
(MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) .... 108
MAC Address
(Network, Information menu) .............. 115
APPENDIX
➤
Index
En 146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUTE key ..................................................12
Muting .......................................................48
Playback (iPod) ........................................ 65
Playback (NAS) ........................................ 71
Playback (PC) .......................................... 71
Playback (USB storage device) ............... 68
Power Amp Assign
(Speaker, Setup menu) ...................... 100
Power cable connection .......................... 38
PRE OUT jacks ......................................... 23
Program Service (Radio Data System) .... 61
Pure Direct ............................................... 55
PURE DIRECT (sound mode) ................... 55
Pure Direct Mode
Remote control sensor setting
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ............... 116
Remote control signal transmitter
(remote control) .................................... 12
Remote ID
(System, Information menu) ............... 115
REMOTE IN jack ....................................... 80
REMOTE OUT jack ................................... 37
REMOTE SENSOR
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ............... 116
Rename (input source name) ................... 90
Rename (network name) ........................ 108
Rename (scene name) ............................. 93
Rename/Icon Select (Input menu) ........... 90
Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) ......... 93
Repeat (iPod, Option menu) .................... 67
Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) ............... 73
Repeat
(USB storage device, Option menu) .... 70
Reset (remote control) ............................ 123
Reset (Scene menu) ................................. 93
Resolution
(Video Mode, Setup menu) ................ 105
Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) ..... 95
Reverb Level (Sound Program menu) ...... 95
Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) ...... 95
Roleplaying Game (sound program) ....... 52
Room Size (Sound Program menu) .......... 95
Router connection .................................... 35
N
NAS (Network Attached Storage) .............35
NAS connection ........................................35
Neo:6 Cinema (surround decoder) ...........55
Neo:6 Music (surround decoder) ..............55
Network (Information menu) ....................115
Network Attached Storage (NAS) .............35
Network connection ..................................35
Network Name
(Network, Information menu) ...............115
Network Name
(Network, Setup menu) .......................108
Network Standby
(Network, Setup menu) .......................108
Numeric keys (remote control) ..................12
(Sound, Setup menu) ......................... 104
R
Radio Data System (FM radio) ................. 61
Radio Data System information ................ 61
Radio Text (Radio Data System) .............. 61
Rear panel (part names and functions) ... 11
Recording device connection .................. 36
RECOV./BACKUP
O
ON SCREEN key .......................................12
On-screen menu .......................................12
OPTICAL jack ............................................24
OPTION key ..............................................84
Option menu .............................................84
Option menu items ....................................84
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ............... 118
REMOTE CON AMP
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ............... 116
Remote connection .................................. 37
Remote control
(part names and functions) .................. 12
(playback device) .............................. 120
Remote control code registration (TV) ... 119
Remote control ID setting
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ............... 116
Remote control ID setting
P
Parametric EQ (Speaker, Setup menu) ...102
PARTY key ................................................82
Party mode ................................................82
Party Mode Set
S
S VIDEO jack ............................................ 24
Sampling
(Audio Signal, Information menu) ....... 114
Save (Scene menu) .................................. 92
Scene configuration ................................. 50
SCENE function ........................................ 49
(Multi Zone, Setup menu) ....................110
PC connection ...........................................35
PHONES jack ..............................................9
PHONO jack (turntable connection) .........33
(remote control) .................................. 116
Remote control sensor ............................... 5
APPENDIX
➤
Index
En 147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCENE key ................................................49
SCENE link playback ................................37
Scene menu ..............................................91
Scene menu items ....................................92
Sci-Fi (sound program) .............................52
Setting Data Copy
(Speaker, Setup menu) .......................100
Setting Pattern
(Speaker, Setup menu) .......................100
Setup menu items .....................................98
Short Message
Speaker Impedance
(System, Information menu) ............... 115
Speaker impedance setting
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................. 16
Speaker indicator (front display) .............. 10
Spectacle (sound program) ..................... 52
Sports (sound program) ........................... 52
Standard (sound program) ...................... 52
Standby indicator (front panel) .................. 8
Surround Back Room Size
(Sound Program menu) ........................ 95
Surround decoder .................................... 55
Surround Initial Delay
(Sound Program menu) ........................ 95
Surround Liveness
(Sound Program menu) ........................ 95
Surround Room Size
(Sound Program menu) ........................ 95
S-video cable ........................................... 24
System (Information menu) .................... 115
System ID
(HDMI Control, Setup menu) .............. 106
Standby Through
(Display Set, Setup menu) ..................111
Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) ......................67
Shuffle (PC/NAS, Option menu) ................73
Shuffle
(HDMI, Setup menu) .......................... 107
STEREO
(System, Information menu) ............... 115
T
(sound program subcategory) ............. 53
Stereo pin cable ....................................... 24
Stereo reception mode (FM radio) ........... 57
STP network cable ................................... 35
STRAIGHT (sound mode) ........................ 54
Straight decode ....................................... 54
Subnet Mask .......................................... 107
Subnet Mask
(Network, Information menu) .............. 115
Subwoofer
(Configuration, Setup menu) .............. 101
Subwoofer connection ............................. 18
Subwoofer Trim (Option menu) ................ 87
Surround
(Configuration, Setup menu) .............. 101
Surround Back
(Configuration, Setup menu) .............. 101
Surround Back Initial Delay
(Sound Program menu) ........................ 95
Surround Back Liveness
Target Zone
(Trigger Output, Setup menu) ............ 112
Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) ......... 103
The Bottom Line (sound program) ........... 53
The Roxy Theatre (sound program) ......... 53
Tone Control (Option menu) ..................... 85
Traffic information ..................................... 62
Traffic Program (Option menu) ................ 62
Trigger function ........................................ 37
Trigger Mode
(Trigger Output, Setup menu) ............ 112
TRIGGER OUT jacks ................................ 37
Trigger Output1
(Function, Setup menu) ...................... 112
Trigger Output2
(Function, Setup menu) ...................... 112
TUNER FRQ STEP
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ............... 117
Tuner Frq. Step
(System, Information menu) ............... 115
Tuning (FM/AM radio) .............................. 57
Tuning (HD Radio) ................................... 59
(USB storage device, Option menu) .....70
SILENT CINEMA .......................................56
Simple play (iPod) .....................................66
Single measure (YPAO) ............................42
SLEEP key .................................................12
Sleep timer ................................................12
Sound (Setup menu) ...............................103
Sound field effect ......................................52
Sound mode selection ..............................51
Sound program .........................................52
Sound program category ..........................52
Sound Program menu items .....................95
Speaker (Setup menu) ............................100
Speaker connection ..................................17
Speaker connection (bi-amp) ...................22
Speaker connection (Zone2) ....................22
SPEAKER IMP.
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................116
(Sound Program menu) ........................ 95
APPENDIX
➤
Index
En 148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turntable ...................................................33
TV Audio Input
(HDMI Control, Setup menu) ...............106
TV connection ...........................................25
TV FORMAT
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................117
TV Format (System, Information menu) ...115
TV operation keys (remote control) ...........12
Y
Yamaha Parametric room
Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) .................. 40
YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room
Acoustic Optimizer) ............................. 40
YPAO MIC jack ........................................ 40
YPAO microphone ................................... 40
Z
U
Zone (Information menu) ........................ 115
Zone Rename
USB jack .....................................................9
USB storage device connection ...............68
(Main Zone Set, Setup menu) ............ 109
Zone Rename
(Zone2 Set, Setup menu) ................... 110
Zone Scene Rename
(Zone2 Set, Setup menu) ................... 110
Zone2 ....................................................... 78
Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) ..... 109
V
VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) ....118
Video (Setup menu) ................................105
VIDEO AUX jacks ......................................34
Video device connection ..........................31
VIDEO jack ................................................24
Video Mode (Option menu) .......................87
Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) ...........105
Video Out (Input menu) .............................90
Video pin cable .........................................24
Video Signal (Information menu) .............114
Video signal type setting
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................117
Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................54
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) ................54
Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) ...........109
Volume Interlock (Input menu) ..................90
Volume Trim (Option menu) ......................86
VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) ................54
W
Wall Paper (Display Set, Setup menu) ....111
Warning message (YPAO) ........................47
Windows Media Player ..............................71
APPENDIX
➤
Index
En 149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
© 2012 Yamaha Corporation YE448A0/EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|